Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptores AV
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
Este manual también es adecuado para
RX-V363
AV R e c e i ve r
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
01EN_RX-V363_U_cv-1.fm Page 1 Friday, May 9, 2008 10:05 AM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Caution-i En
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved
with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and
uneven surfaces may cause the product and
cart combination to overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Caution-ii En
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as
practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
Caution-iii En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press ASTANDBY/ON to set this
unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet.
Voltages are 110–120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is turned off by ASTANDBY/ON.
This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this
unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of
power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
1 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
English
Features ................................................................... 2
Getting started ........................................................ 3
Quick start guide .................................................... 4
Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4
Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5
Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other
components............................................................ 6
Step 3: Turn on the power and
press SCENE 1 button ........................................... 7
What do you want to do with this unit? ..................... 8
Connections ............................................................. 9
Rear panel .................................................................. 9
Placing speakers....................................................... 10
Connecting speakers ................................................ 11
Setting the speaker impedance
(U.S.A. and Canada models only) ....................... 12
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13
Information on HDMI™.......................................... 14
Connecting video components................................. 15
Connecting audio components................................. 17
Connecting a Yamaha iPod™ universal dock and
Bluetooth™ adapter............................................. 18
Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel............................................................ 18
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 19
Connecting the power cable..................................... 19
Turning on and off the power .................................. 19
Front panel display .................................................. 20
Basic setup ............................................................. 22
Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 24
Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 24
Creating your original SCENE templates................ 27
Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 28
Playback ................................................................ 29
Basic operations....................................................... 29
Additional operations............................................... 30
Sound field programs ........................................... 34
Sound field program descriptions ............................ 34
FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 37
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 37
Manual tuning .......................................................... 37
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 38
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 38
Selecting preset stations........................................... 39
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 39
Using iPod™.......................................................... 40
Controls and functions for iPod™........................... 40
Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 41
Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and
your Bluetooth™ component .............................. 41
Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 41
Recording .............................................................. 42
Set menu .................................................................43
Using set menu ........................................................ 44
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 45
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 48
3 OPTION MENU................................................... 50
Remote control features........................................51
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 51
Setting remote control codes ................................... 53
Advanced setup......................................................54
Troubleshooting.....................................................55
Glossary..................................................................60
Specifications .........................................................62
Index .......................................................................63
(at the end of this manual)
Front panel................................................................i
Remote control ....................................................... ii
List of remote control codes ................................. iii
Contents
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote
control. In case the button names differ between the front
panel and the remote control, the button name on the
remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
•“
A
STANDBY/ON” or “
3
DVD” (example) indicates
the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote
control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end
of this manual for the information about each position of
the parts.
•
The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the
corresponding reference page(s).
Features
2 En
Built-in 5-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 100 W/ch
Center: 100 W
Surround: 100 W/ch
[Other models]
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front: 100 W/ch
Center: 100 W
Surround: 100 W/ch
SCENE select function
◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations
◆ SCENE template customizing capability
Decoders and DSP circuits
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of
multi-channel surround sound
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode
◆ Dolby Digital decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder
◆ DTS decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
™
Sophisticated FM/AM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition
video (includes 1080p video signal transmission)
DOCK terminal
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such
as YBA-10, sold separately).
Other features
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ Component video input/output capability
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ iPod controlling capability
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
iPod™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is
used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of
DTS, Inc.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound
come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your
sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, Ya maha and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
Features
Getting started
3 En
INTRODUCTION
English
■ Checking the supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
❏ Remote control
❏ Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4)
❏ AM loop antenna
❏ Indoor FM antenna
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
Select the switch position (upper or lower)
according to your local voltage using a straight
slot screwdriver.
Voltages are 110-120/220-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries
(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following condition:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
• Do not use an old battery and a new one together.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control
code.
Getting started
Caution
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE
plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may
cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire
hazard.
110V-
120V
220V-
240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
Notes
1
3
2
Quick start guide
4 En
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy
DVD movie playback in your home theater.
Prepare the following items.
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speaker ..................................... x 2
❏ Center speaker ................................... x 1
❏ Surround speaker .............................. x 2
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.
❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
❏ Speaker cable ......................................... x 5
❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output
jack.
❏ Video monitor ......................................... x 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.
❏ Video cable ............................................. x 2
Select an RCA composite video cable.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1
Quick start guide
Front right
speaker
Subwoofer
Surround left
speaker
Front left
speaker
Surround right
speaker
Center speaker
Video monitor
DVD player
Enjoy DVD playback!
Step 1: Set up your speakers
☞
P. 5
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
Step 3: Turn on the power and
press SCENE 1 button
☞
P. 6
☞
P. 7
Preparation: Check the items
Quick start guide
5 En
INTRODUCTION
English
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the
room.
2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.
Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with
a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped
(grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of
your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–”
(black) terminals.
3 Connect each speaker cable to the
corresponding speaker terminal on this unit.
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables
together to prevent short circuits.
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal
part of this unit.
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Front speakers
Center and surround speakers
4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the input
jack on the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT jack on this unit.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
LRLR
LR
L
R
L
R
DOCK
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
AUDIOMULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
1
2
3
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CD
DTV/CBL
DTV/
CBL
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
FRONT A
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DVR
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DVR CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
Y
P
R
P
B
12 3 4
To the front right
speaker
To the front left
speaker
Loosen Insert Tighten
To the surround
left speaker
To the center speaker
To the surround
right speaker
Press
down
Insert Release
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT jack
Subwoofer cable
Input jack
AV receiver
Subwoofer
Quick start guide
6 En
1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the
digital coaxial audio output jack on your DVD
player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack on this unit.
2 Connect the video cable to the composite
video output jack on your DVD player and the
DVD VIDEO jack on this unit.
3 Connect the video cable to the video input
jack on your video monitor and the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack on this unit.
4 Connect the power plug of this unit and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
LRLR
LR
L
R
L
R
DOCK
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
AUDIOMULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
1
2
3
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CD
DTV/CBL
DTV/
CBL
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
FRONT A
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DVR
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DVR CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
Y
P
R
P
B
Make sure that this unit and the DVD
player are unplugged from the AC wall
outlets.
Digital coaxial
audio output
jack
Digital coaxial audio
cable
DVD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL jack
DVD player
AV receiver
Composite video
output jack
Video cable
DVD VIDEO jack
DVD player
AV r eceiver
■ For further connections
• Using the other kind of speaker
combinations
☞
P. 10
• Connecting a video monitor and
DVD player
☞
P. 15
• Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner and
DVD recorder
☞
P. 15
• Connecting to the HDMI jacks
☞
P. 16
• Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks
☞
P. 16
• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front
panel
☞
P. 18
• Connecting a CD player and an MD
recorder
☞
P. 17
• Connecting a DVD player via analog
multi-channel audio connection
☞
P. 17
• Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna
☞
P. 19
• Connecting an iPod/Bluetooth dock
☞
P. 18
Video monitor
AV receiver
Video input jack
Video cable
VIDEO MONITOR
OUT jack
Quick start guide
7 En
INTRODUCTION
English
1 Turn on the video monitor and then set the
input source selector of the video monitor to
this unit.
2 Press ASTANDBY/ON on the front panel.
3 Press PSCENE 1.
“DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display,
and this unit automatically optimize own status for
the DVD playback.
y
The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while
this unit is in the SCENE mode.
4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your
player.
5 Rotate HVOLUME to adjust the volume.
When you change the input source or sound field program, the
SCENE mode is deactivated and the indicator on the SCENE
button turns off.
■ About SCENE function
Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can turn on this
unit and recall your favorite input source and sound field
program according to the SCENE template that has been
assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are
built combinations of input sources and sound field
programs.
y
If you connect a Yamaha product that has capability of the
SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the
component and start playback. Refer to the instruction manual of
the DVD player for further information.
■ Using the other SCENE buttons
Step 3: Turn on the power and
press SCENE 1 button
Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 12).
Note
Default
SCENE
button
The name of the SCENE template
and its description
SCENE
1
DVD Viewing
– input source: DVD
– sound field program: STRAIGHT
For when you want to listen to a music disc from
the connected DVD player as the background
music for this room.
SCENE
2
Disc Listening
– input source: DVD
– sound field program: 5ch Stereo
For when you want to listen to a music disc from
the connected DVD player as the background
music for this room.
SCENE
3
TV Viewing
*1
– input source: DTV/CBL
– sound field program: STRAIGHT
For when you want to watch a TV program.
SCENE
4
Radio Listening
*2, *3, *4
– input source: TUNER
– sound field program: Music Enh. 5ch
For when you want to listen to a music program
from the FM radio station
Quick start guide
8 En
*1
You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in
advance. See page 16 for details.
*2
You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this
unit in advance. See page 19 for details.
*3
You have to tune into the desired radio station. See pages 37 to
39 for the tuning information.
*4
To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected
AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the
indoor FM antenna.
y
If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change
the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See
page 24 for details.
■ After using this unit...
Press ASTANDBY/ON on the front panel to set
this unit to the standby mode.
This unit is set to the standby mode. To turn on this unit
from the standby mode, press ASTANDBY/ON (or
DPOWER) on the front panel. See page 19 for details.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power
in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control.
Notes
Note
What do you want to do with this
unit?
■ Customizing the SCENE templates
• Using various SCENE templates
☞
P. 24
■ Using various input sources
• Basic controls of this unit
☞
P. 29
• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs
☞
P. 37
• Using your iPod with this unit
☞
P. 40
• Using the Bluetooth component
☞
P. 41
■ Using various sound features
• Using various sound field programs
☞
P. 34
■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit
• Optimizing the speaker parameters for your
listening room (BASIC SETUP)
☞
P. 22
• Manually adjusting various parameters of
this unit
☞
P. 43
• Setting the remote control
☞
P. 51
• Adjusting the advanced parameters
☞
P. 54
■ Additional features
• Automatically turning off this unit
☞
P. 33
Connections
9 En
PREPARATION
English
Connections
Rear panel
Name See page
1
DOCK terminal 18
2
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 16
3
HDMI jacks 16
4
VIDEO jacks 15
5
ANTENNA terminals 19
6
SPEAKERS terminals 11
7
DIGITAL INPUT jacks 15, 17
8
MULTI CH INPUT jacks 17
9
AUDIO jacks 15, 17
0
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack 11
LRLR
LR
L
R
L
R
DOCK
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
AUDIOMULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
1
2
3
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CD
DTV/CBL
DTV/
CBL
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
FRONT A
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DVR
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DVR CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
Y
P
R
P
B
12 345 6
78 9 0
10 En
Connections
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the
ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a
center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction
of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is
not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front
speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
Placing speakers
60˚
30˚
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
FR
FL
C
SL
SR
SW
11 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS
terminal
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then
twist the bare wires of the cable together to
prevent short circuits.
Connecting speakers
Caution
• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.
• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 12).
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage
this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the
speakers away from the monitor.
LRLR
LR
L
R
L
R
DOCK
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
AUDIOMULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OUTPUT
ANTENNA
SPEAKERS
1
2
3
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CD
DTV/CBL
DTV/
CBL
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
SURROUND CENTER FRONT B
FRONT A
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DVR
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DVR CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
Y
P
R
P
B
Subwoofer
Center
speaker
Front speakers (B)
LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front speakers (A)
LeftRight
LeftRight
10 mm (3/8”)
12 En
Connections
■ Connecting to the FRONT A terminals
1 Loosen the knob.
2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into
the slit on the terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Connecting the banana plug
(except Europe, Russia, Korea, and Asia models)
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the
knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
■ Connecting to the FRONT B, CENTER,
and SURROUND terminals
1 Press down the tab.
2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into
the hole on the terminal.
3 Release the tab to secure the wire.
1 Make sure this unit is turned off.
See page 19 for details about turning on or off this
unit.
2 Press and hold
J
TONE CONTROL and
then press
A
STANDBY/ON to turn on this
unit.
This unit turns on, an the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
K
PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to
select “SP IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press
L
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“6ΩMIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press
A
STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.
1
2
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Setting the speaker impedance
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Caution
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit.
Note
SP IMP.- 8 MIN
SP IMP.- 6 MIN
13 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
■ Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. All digital input jacks are compatible with
digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.
• This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
■ Video jacks
This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y)
and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals transmitted on
separate wires of component video cables.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B
P
R
PB
Y
P
R
V
COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Composite
video cable
plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
Notes
PR
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
14 En
Connections
You can play back pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source component to this unit using HDMI
connections.
At that time, audio/video signals output from the connected component (such as DVD player etc.) are output to the
connected video monitor only when this unit is turned on and set to the input source (DVD or DTV/CBL).
Furthermore, available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the
instruction manual of each connected component.
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
y
• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters
(16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack
↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
Information on HDMI™
Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output from any speaker terminals but output from the connected video
monitor.
To enjoy the sound from speakers connected to this unit,
– make an analog or digital connection besides the HDMI connection (see page 16).
– mute the volume of the connected video monitor.
HDMI cable
plug
HDMI
15 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
y
You can also connect a video monitor, DVD player, digital TV,
and cable TV to this unit using the HDMI or COMPONENT
VIDEO connection (see page 16).
■ Connecting a video monitor and a DVD
player
*
When you use the internal tuner of the TV as the input source,
connect the digital or analog audio output jacks of the TV and
digital or analog audio input jacks of this unit.
■ Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner
and a DVD recorder
Connecting video components
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
L
R
L
R
DOCK
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
AUDIOMULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
1
2
3
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CD
DTV/CBL
DTV/
CBL
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
MONITOR
OUT
DVR
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DVR CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
P
R
P
B
C
L
R
VV
DVD player
Video monitor*
Video in
Audio out
Audio out
Video out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
L
R
L
R
DOCK
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
AUDIOMULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
1
2
3
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CD
DTV/CBL
DTV/
CBL
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
MONITOR
OUT
DVR
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DVR CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
P
R
P
B
L
R
L
R
L
R
VVV
O
Cable TV or
Satellite tuner
DVD recorder
Audio out
Video out
Audio out
Audio out
Video out
Audio in
Video in
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
16 En
Connections
■ Connecting to the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
You can enjoy high-quality pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source components to this unit using
HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO connections.
Be sure to connect your video components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if you connect
your video monitor to this unit using an HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO connection, connect your video components to this unit using
the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO connection.
HDMI connection
• Connect the input source components to the HDMI DVD or
HDMI DTV/CBL jack to display the video images on the video
monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
• Audio/video signals output from the connected component
(such as DVD player etc.) are output to the connected video
monitor only when this unit is turned on and set to the input
source (DVD or DTV/CBL).
• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the
connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of
each connected component.
Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Note
Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output
from any speaker terminals but output from the
connected video monitor.
To enjoy the sound from speakers connected to this unit,
– make an analog or digital connection besides the
HDMI connection (see page 15).
– mute the volume of the connected video monitor.
Notes
O
MPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO
AUDIOMULTI CH INPUT
ANTENNA
D
TV/CBL DVR
DVD DTV/CBL
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
MONITOR
OUT
DVR
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
AM
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
Video monitor
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
DVD player
L
R
L
R
DOCK
COMPONENT VIDEO
H
D
VIDEO
AUDIOMULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
1
2
3
DVD DTV/CBL DVR
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CD
DTV/CBL
DTV/
CBL
DVDOUT DTV/CBL
MO
N
O
DVR
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DVR
C
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
P
R
P
B
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
DVD player
Video monitor
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
DVD recorder
Video in
Video out
Video out
Video out
17 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
■ Connecting a CD player and a CD
recorder/MD recorder
When you connect your CD player via analog and digital
connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL
INPUT jack.
■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for
discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks
on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 30), this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We
recommend that you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system
before using this feature.
Connecting audio components
Note
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
L
R
L
R
VIDEO
AUDIOMULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OUTPUT
1
2
3
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CD
DTV/CBL
DTV/
CBL
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DVR
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DVR CD
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
GND
FM
75
UNBAL.
Y
P
B
L
R
L
R
L
R
O
CD player CD recorder or MD
recorder
Audio outAudio out Audio inAudio out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
L
R
L
R
MULTI CH INPUT
1
2
3
DVD
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
FRONT CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
DTV/CBL DVR
IN
L
R
L
R
Multi-format player or
external decoder
Center out
Subwoofer out
Surround out
Front out
Notes
18 En
Connections
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth
adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). Connect a
Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter to the
DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its
dedicated cable.
y
Refer to “Using iPod™” on page 40 for playback of your iPod
and “Using Bluetooth™ components” on page 41 for playback of
your Bluetooth components.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
• The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
• The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take
priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks.
Connecting a Yamaha iPod™
universal dock and Bluetooth™
adapter
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
MULTI CH INP
U
COMPONENT VI
D
DOCK
DIGITAL INPUT
L
1
2
3
R
SURRO
U
FRONT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
CD
DTV/
CBL
DVD
P
R
P
B
Y
DTV/CBL DV
R
Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth adapter
Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks
on the front panel
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
components before making connections.
Notes
STANDBY
/ON
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A/B/OFF
SILENT CINEMA
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
BAND A/B/C/D/E
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT NIGHT
EFFECT
SCENE
PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
AUDIO SELECT
INPUT
1234
VOLUME
R
L
AUDIO PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
VIDEO
VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
V
L
R
Game console or
video camera
3.5 mm
stereo mini
plug
Audio out
Video out
19 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna
y
The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity
and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND
terminal.
Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna
The types of the supplied AM loop antenna is different
depending on the models.
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable
into the AC wall outlet.
■ Turning on this unit
Press
A
STANDBY/ON (or
D
POWER) to turn
on this unit.
y
When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
■ Set this unit to the standby mode
Press
A
STANDBY/ON (or
E
STANDBY) to set
this unit to the standby mode.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power
in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control.
Connecting the FM and AM
antennas
Notes
D
EO
ANTENNA
R
SURR
O
AUDIO OUT
P
DVR
CD
S
N
O
UT
DVR
AM
GND
FM
UNBAL.
75
N OUT
MONITOR
OUT
MD/
C
D
-R
O
UT
(
R
EC)
IN
(P
LAY)
AM loop
antenna
(supplied)
Ground
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32
ft) of vinyl-covered wire
extended outdoors from a
window.
Open the
lever
Insert Close the
lever
Note
Connecting the power cable
Turning on and off the power
Note
(U.S.A. model)
Power cable
To the AC wall outlet
20 En
Connections
1
Decoder indicator
Lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions.
2
ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
selected (see page 34).
3
VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active
(see page 36).
4
SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 36).
5
DOCK indicator
• Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit
(see page 18) when V-AUX is selected as the input
source.
• Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adaptor
(such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth
component is in the paring (see page 18) or the
Bluetooth adaptor is searching the Bluetooth
component (see page 41).
• Light up while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth
adaptor is connected to the Bluetooth component
(see page 18).
6
Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
7
Tuner indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode
(see page 37).
8
MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 30).
9
VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
0
PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
A
Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 30).
B
SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected
(see page 29).
C
NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode
(see page 31).
D
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a sound field program
(see page 34).
E
Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
F
SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 33).
G
Input channel and speaker indicators
LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE
signal.
Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
Front panel display
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
q PL
q PL
ENHANCER
SILENT CINEMA
NIGHT
DOCK
AUTO
PRESET
TUNED
MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
A B
SP
mS
ft
dB
LFE
LCR
SL SR
q
DIGITAL
t
dB
STEREO
A0 C FE
G
D
6
4 7 91 2 3 85
B
Input channel indicators
LFE
LCR
SL SR
LFE indicator
21 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
1
Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
y
To set the remote control codes for other components,
seepage53.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
• To set the remote control codes for other components,
seepage53.
Notes
30º 30º
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
Basic setup
22 En
The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort.
• Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit.
• If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU”
(see page 45).
• Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 45).
• Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.
• Press
8
RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level.
1 Press
4
AMP on the remote control.
2 Press
H
MENU.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
7
ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”.
“ROOM” appears in the front panel display.
ROOM: S >M L
4 Press
7
l / h to select the desired setting.
Select the size of the room where you have installed
your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined
as follows:
Choices: S, M, L
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft
2
(4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m
2
)
M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft
2
(6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m
2
)
L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft
2
(7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m
2
)
[Other models]
S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m
2
M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m
2
L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m
2
5 Press
7
n to select “SUBWOOFER” and then
7
l / h to select the desired setting.
Choices: YES, NONE
• Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your
system.
• Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in
your system.
6 Press
7
n to select “SPEAKERS” and then
7
l / h to select the number of speakers
connected to this unit.
Basic setup
Notes
BASIC SETUP
.
Choice Display Speakers
2spk
Front L/R
3spk
Front L/R, Center
4spk
Front L/R, Surround L/R
5spk
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
SUBWOOFER
..
YES
SPEAKERS
..
5spk
LR
LCR
LR
SL SR
LCR
SL SR
23 En
Basic setup
PREPARATION
English
7 Press
7
n to select “SET” and then
7
l / h
to select the desired setting.
SET >CANCEL
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to apply the settings you made.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure
without making any changes.
y
You can also press
H
MENU to cancel the setup procedure.
8 Press
7
ENTER to confirm your selection.
If you selected “SET” in step 7, each speaker outputs
a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears
in the front panel display for a few seconds and then
“CHECK OK?” appears in the front panel display.
y
• Check the speaker connections (see page 5) and adjust the
“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 6, if necessary.
• The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test
tone flashes in the front panel display.
9 Press
7
l / h to select the desired setting.
Choices: YES, NO
• Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if
the test tone levels from each speaker were
satisfactory.
• Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level
adjustment menu to balance the output level of
each speaker.
10 Press
7
ENTER to confirm your selection.
• If you selected “YES” in step 9, the setup
procedure is completed and the display returns to
the top set menu display. Press
H
MENU to exit
from “BASIC SETUP”.
• If you selected “NO” in step 9, the front speaker
level adjustment display appears in the front panel
display.
11 Press
7
k / n to select a speaker and then
7
l / h to adjust the balance.
The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the
surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn.
•Press
7
h to increase the value.
•Press
7
l to decrease the value.
FR ----||----
• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front
left and right speakers.
• Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front
left and center speakers.
• Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front
left and surround left speakers.
• Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the
surround left and surround right speakers.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the
front left speaker and the subwoofer.
The available speaker channels differ depending on the
setting of the speakers.
12 Press
H
MENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”.
CHECK:TestTone
CHECK OK?
..
YES
Note
SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES
24 En
This unit is equipped with 13 preset SCENE templates for
various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory
setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to
each SCENE button:
SCENE 1: DVD Viewing
SCENE 2: Disc Listening
SCENE 3: TV Viewing
SCENE 4: Radio Listening
If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select
the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template
library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE
buttons on the front panel and the remote control.
1 Press and hold the desired
P
SCENE (or
5
SCENE) button for 3 seconds.
The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the
front panel starts to flash, and the name of currently
assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel
display.
2 Press
N
INPUT l / h (or press
4
AMP and
then
7
l / h) to select the desired template.
3 Press the
P
SCENE (or
5
SCENE) button
again to confirm the selection.
The selected SCENE template is assigned to the
button.
y
To cancel the procedure, press
4
AMP and then
8
RETURN.
Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the
corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input
source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 28
for details.
Selecting the SCENE templates
Selecting the desired SCENE
template
1
SCENE template library
(Image)
Select the desired SCENE template
Assign the
SCENE template
to the SCENE
button
1
DVD Viewing
1
1
or
Remote control
Flashes
3 seconds
3 seconds
Front panel
Note
l INPUT h
AMP
ENTER
DVD Movie View
or
Front panel
Remote control
1
1
or
Remote controlFront panel
25 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
English
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?
When iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth adapter, this unit
plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal.
y
You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 27 for details.
Note
Radio Listening
CD Listening
CD Music Listening
DVD Live Viewing
DVD Movie Viewing
DVD Viewing
Music Disc Listening
Disc Listening
DVR Viewing
TV Viewing
TV Sports Viewing
Game Playing
DVD
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
TUNER (FM/AM)
CD
DVD
DVR
Video sources
(DVD video,
Recorded video)
TV programs
Video games
Radio programs
Music discs (CD,
SA-CD or DVD-Audio)
SCENE templates
Which component do you
like for playback?
Which source do you like to
play back?
1
2
4
3
Default SCENE
buttons
iPod or Bluetooth
component
DOCK
Dock Listening
26 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Preset SCENE template descriptions
SCENE template
Features
Input source Playback mode
DVD Viewing (SCENE 1 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents
on your DVD player.
DVD STRAIGHT
DVD Movie Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your
DVD player.
DVD Movie Dramatic
DVD Live Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy music live video on
your DVD player.
DVD Pop/Rock
DVR Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your
digital video recorder.
DVR Movie Dramatic
Music Disc Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on
your DVD player.
DVD 2ch Stereo
Disc Listening
(SCENE 2 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources as
the back ground music on your DVD player.
DVD 5ch Stereo
CD Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back music source as
the back ground music on your CD player.
CD 5ch Stereo
CD Music Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on
your CD player.
CD 2ch Stereo
Radio Listening
(SCENE 4 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio
programs.
TUNER Music Enh. 5ch
Dock Listening
Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your
iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth
component that is connected to the Bluetooth adapter.
DOCK Music Enh. 5ch
TV Viewing (SCENE 3 as the default setting)
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy TV programs.
DTV/CBL STRAIGHT
TV Sports Viewing
Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on
TV.
DTV/CBL TV Sports
Game Playing
Select this SCENE template when you play video games.
V-AUX Game
27 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
English
BASIC
OPERATION
You can create your original SCENE templates for each
SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 13 SCENE
templates to create the original SCENE templates.
■ Customizing the preset SCENE
templates
Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates.
1 Press and hold the desired
5
SCENE button
for 3 seconds and then press
4
AMP.
The SCENE template customizing display appears on
the front panel display.
When the SCENE template you want to customize is not
assigned to any of the
5
SCENE button, press
7
l / h
repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template (see
page 24).
2 Press
7
k / n to select the desired parameter
of the SCENE template and then
7
l / h to
select the desired value of the selected
parameter.
You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE
template:
• The input source component
• The active sound field programs or STRAIGHT
mode
• The night listening mode setting (see page 31)
− SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening
mode.
− CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the
CINEMA mode.
− MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the
MUSIC mode.
3 Press the
5
SCENE button again to confirm
the edit.
y
• An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original
SCENE template.
• To cancel the procedure, press
4
AMP and then
8
RETURN.
• After changing the assignment of the SCENE template to the
5
SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the
SCENE template on the remote control. See page 28 for details.
• You can create a customized SCENE template for each
5
SCENE button, and if you create another customized
SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized
SCENE template with the new one.
• The customized SCENE template is only available for the
assigned
5
SCENE button.
Creating your original SCENE
templates
Note
: DVD Viewing
: DVD
SCENE
INPUT
SCENE : DVD Viewing
1
SCENE template library
(Image)
Select the desired SCENE
template
Assign the SCENE
template to the SCENE
button
Create an original SCENE
template
1
3 seconds
AMP
Notes
1
28 En
Selecting the SCENE templates
■ Controlling the input source
components in the SCENE mode
You can operate both this unit and the input source
component by using the remote control. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
advance (see page 53).
1 Press the desired
5
SCENE button on the
remote control.
2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below
to control the input source component of the
selected SCENE template.
*
These buttons control the input source component. See
page 51 for details of the function of each button.
■ Setting input source of the customized
SCENE template on the remote control
If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE
template, you must set the input source of the SCENE
template on the remote control to operate the input source
component correctly.
Press and hold the
5
SCENE button and the
desired input selector button (
3
) for 3 seconds.
y
Press the
5
SCENE button again to operate the input source
component.
Using remote control on the SCENE feature
Note
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DE
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
SCENE buttons
*
PLAYBACK
29 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press
I
SPEAKERS repeatedly to select the
front speakers you want to use.
The respective speaker indicators lights up in the
front panel display.
3 Press
N
INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
one of the input selector buttons (
3
)) to
select the desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.
4 Start playback on the selected component or
select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
• See page 37 for details about FM or AM tuning
instructions.
5 Rotate
H
VOLUME (or press
I
VOLUME
+/–) to adjust the volume to the desired
output level.
6 Press
K
PROGRAM l / h (or press
4
AMP
and then press
0
PROG l / h) repeatedly to
select the desired sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display.
See page 34 for details about sound field programs.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 30).
• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48
kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”
mode (see page 36).
• To display information about the currently selected input source
in the front panel display, see page 32 for details.
■ Guide to contents
Playback
Caution
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.
Basic operations
INPUT:DVD
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
Available input source
Currently selected input source
Notes
When you want to...
See
page
Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 31
Edit parameters of sound field programs 35
Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at
night
31
Use headphones 30
Select a decoder to play back sources with 35
Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 33
Movie Dramatic
Currently selected surround field program
30 En
Playback
■ Using your headphones
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
is automatically activated (see page 36).
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
■ Muting the audio output
Press
F
MUTE to mute the audio output.
Press
F
MUTE again to resume the audio output.
y
• You can also rotate
H
VOLUME (or press
I
VOLUME +/–) to
resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using “MUTE TYP.” in
“SOUND MENU” (see page 48).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
■ Selecting the front speaker set
Press
I
SPEAKERS repeatedly to turn on or off
the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT
A or FRONT B speaker terminals.
The active front speaker set changes as follows:
Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front
speaker setting.
■ Using the Zone B feature
When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 45),
you can use the speakers connected to the FRONT B
speaker terminals in another room (Zone B).
Press
I
SPEAKERS on the front panel
repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers.
When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in
the main room are muted.
• You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers
simultaneously.
• If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate
the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates
automatically (see page 36).
■ Selecting the component connected to
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input
source
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 17) as the input
source.
Press
N
INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
4
AMP and then press
B
MULTI CH IN) so that
“MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display.
y
Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the
parameter for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 49).
• The input signals are amplified and output directly without
sound processing. Therefore, you cannot activate sound field
programs, the night listening mode, etc. while MULTI CH is
selected as the input source.
• When headphones are used, signals are output only from the
front left and right channels.
Additional operations
Notes
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
A/B/OFF
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
A/B/C/D/E
BAND
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
AUDIO SELECT
NIGHTSTRAIGHT
EFFECT
TONE CONTROL
l INPUT hl PROGRAM h
VOLUME
SCENE
1234
VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
Note
Notes
Notes
FRONT A
FRONT B
OFF
31 En
Playback
English
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack
assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are
assigned to an input source.
y
• We recommend setting audio input jack select to “AUTO” in
most cases.
• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by
using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 50).
Press
O
AUDIO SELECT (or press
4
AMP and
then
C
AUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the
desired Audio input jack select setting.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.
This feature is not available when no digital input jack are
assigned to the currently selected input source.
■ Selecting the night listening mode
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night.
1 Press
4
AMP and then press
M
NIGHT
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC,
NIGHT OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” to reduce the dynamic
range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to
hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” to preserve
ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select “NIGHT OFF” if you do not want to use this
feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2 Press
7
l / h to adjust the effect level while
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is
displayed in the front panel display.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source.
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher
than 96 kHz.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
■ Adjusting the tonal quality
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front left and right speaker channels.
Press
J
TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
“BASS” or “TREBLE” and then press
K
PROGRAM l / h to adjust the corresponding
frequency response level.
Control range: –10 to +10 dB
Control step: 2
• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response.
• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency
response.
• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency
sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround
speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers.
Note
A.SEL:AUTO
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
Audio input jack select setting
Notes
Notes
32 En
Playback
■ Adjusting speaker levels during
playback
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source.
This operation will override the level adjustment made in “SP
LEVEL” (see page 46).
1 Press
4
AMP and then press
6
LEVEL
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
y
Once you press
6
LEVEL on the remote control, you can
also select the speaker by pressing
7
k / n.
2 Press
7
l / h on the remote control to
adjust the speaker output level.
The control range is from –10 dB to +10 dB.
y
You can press
D
A/B/C/D/E to select a speaker and then
E
PRESET/TUNING l / h to adjust the speaker output level.
■ Displaying the signal information
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Press
4
AMP and then press
H
MENU on
the remote control.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
;BASIC SETUP
2 Press
7
k / n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL
INFO” and then press
7
ENTER.
3 Press
7
k / n to switch the displayed
information.
The following information about the input source
appears in the front panel display.
4 Press
H
MENU to exit.
Note
Display Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
SUR.L
Surround left speaker
SUR.R
Surround right speaker
Display Description
Format Signal format.
Sampling
frequency
The number of samples per second taken
from a continuous signal to make a discrete
signal.
Channel The number of source channels in the input
signal (front/surround/LFE).
Bit rate The number of bits passing a given point
per second.
Flag data Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital,
or PCM signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
33 En
Playback
English
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Using the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time.
Press
4
AMP and then press
O
SLEEP
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press
O
SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the
amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is
set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound field
program.
y
• To cancel the sleep timer, press
O
SLEEP on the remote
control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front
panel display.
• You can also cancel the sleep timer setting by pressing
A
STANDBY/ON (or
E
STANDBY) to set this unit to the
standby mode.
■ Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons (
3
) on the
remote control to select a video source and then
an audio source.
SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
Audio sources
Video sources
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL DVR
DVD
DVD
MULTI CH IN
9
Audio sources
Video sources
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
34 En
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital
decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback
from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source.
Press
K
PROGRAM l / h (or press
4
AMP and
then press
0
PROG l / h repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 30).
• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48
kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”
mode (see page 36).
• When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher
than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.
• You can select “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music Enh. 5ch” by
pressing
K
ENHANCER repeatedly.
The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the
actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the
front, back, left and right.
Sound field programs
Notes
Sound field program descriptions
Category Program Features
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The
sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of
vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments.
Hall
CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The
program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful
reverberation and a majestic atmosphere.
Jazz
CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music.
It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation.
ENTERTAIN
Game
CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games.
The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where
you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies.
TV Sports
CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with
a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come
clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a
comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium.
MOVIE
Movie Spacious
CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular
sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic
range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds.
Movie Dramatic
CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on
three-dimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces
sound effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center
orientation of voices as pivots.
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are.
5ch Stereo
CINEMA DSP processing. Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a
sound field suitable for background music at parties.
ENHANCER
Music Enh. 2ch
Music Enh. 5ch
Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or
5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact.
Note
35 En
Sound field programs
English
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multi-channels.
Press
4
AMP and then press
L
SUR. DECODE
repeatedly to select a decoder.
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the type of source you are playing and your personal
preference.
■ Editing sound fields parameters
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory default
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
1 While listening to a source, press
4
AMP
and then press
7
k / n to select the desired
parameter.
2 Press
7
l / h to change the parameter
value.
You cannot change parameter values when “MEM.GUARD” in
“OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 50).
y
Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.
For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports,
Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic:
DSP level DSP LEVEL
Function: Adjusts the effect level.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
For PRO LOGIC II Music:
Panorama PANORAMA
Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround
speakers as well as the front speakers
for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
Dimension DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field
either towards the front or towards the
rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards
the front), initial setting is STD
(standard).
Center width CT WIDTH
Function: Adjusts the center image from all
three front speakers to varying
degrees. A larger value adjusts the
center image towards the front left and
right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only
from center speaker) to 7 (center
channel sound is output only from
front left and right speakers), initial
setting is 3.
For Music Enh. 2ch and Music Enh. 5ch
Effect level EFCL LVL
Function: Adjusts the effect level.
Choices: LOW, HIGH
STANDARD Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
music sources
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
game sources
Note
36 En
Sound field programs
■
Using sound field programs without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers by creating
virtual speakers.
If you set “SUR. LR” to “NONE” (see page 47), Virtual
CINEMA DSP is automatically activated whenever you
select a sound field program (see page 34).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not be activated even when “SUR.
LR” is set to “NONE” (see page 45) in the following cases:
– when “5ch Stereo” (see page 34) is selected.
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
is automatically activated whenever you connect
headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to sound
field programs (except for 2ch Stereo and Music Enh. 2ch)
(see page 34). When SILENT CINEMA is activated, the
SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decoding mode)
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode,
multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the
appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing. 2-channel stereo sources are output from only
the front left and right speakers.
Press
L
STRAIGHT (or press
4
AMP and then
A
STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”.
To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press
L
STRAIGHT (or
A
STRAIGHT) again so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display.
Note
FM/AM TUNING
37 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Press
N
INPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
C
BAND to select the reception band
(FM or AM).
3 Press
G
TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the
AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,
automatic tuning is not possible. Press
B
PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press
E
PRESET/TUNING l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Press
N
INPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
C
BAND to select the reception band
(FM or AM).
3 Press
G
TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the
AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,
manual tuning is not possible. Press
B
PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press
E
PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune
into the desired station manually.
You can hold down the button to continue searching.
FM/AM tuning
Automatic tuning
AUTO
A
AM
1440
kHz
Lights up
No colon (:)
AUTO
TUNED
A
AM
1530
kHz
Lights up
Manual tuning
Note
A
AM
1440
kHz
No colon (:)
38 En
FM/AM tuning
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8
preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station
groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press
N
INPUT l / h repeatedly so that
“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel
display.
2 Press
C
BAND to select “FM” as the
reception band.
3 Press and hold
F
MEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
You can select the preset station group and the preset station
number where the first received station will be stored by pressing
D
A/B/C/D/E and then
E
PRESET/TUNING l / h.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page.
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See page 37 for tuning instructions.
2 Press
F
MEMORY.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 30 seconds.
3 Press
D
A/B/C/D/E and
E
PRESET/TUNING l / h repeatedly to
select a preset station group and number (A1
to E8) while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press
F
MEMORY while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
Automatic preset tuning
Notes
Flashes
AUTO
MEMORY
A1:FM 87.5 MHz
Flashes
Manual preset tuning
Notes
TUNED
MEMORY
:
C3
AM
630
kHz
Preset station group and number
Flashes
The displayed station has been stored as C3.
TUNED
:
C3
AM
630
kHz
39 En
FM/AM tuning
English
BASIC
OPERATION
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, press
3
TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
1 Press
D
A/B/C/D/E (or
7
A/B/C/D/E l / h)
repeatedly to select the desired preset
station group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
2 Press
E
PRESET/TUNING l / h (or
7
PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired
preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
y
You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly
by pressing the numeric buttons (
N
).
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using
D
A/B/C/D/E
and
E
PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.
2 Press and hold
B
PRESET/TUNING for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using
D
A/B/C/D/E and
E
PRESET/TUNING l /
h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.
4 Press
B
PRESET/TUNING again.
“EXCHANGE E1–A5” appears in the front panel
display and the assignments of the two preset stations
are exchanged.
Selecting preset stations
:
E1
FM
87.5
MHz
Exchanging preset stations
MEMORY
:
E1
FM
87.5
MHz
Flashes
Flashes
MEMORY
:
A5
FM
90.5
MHz
Flashes
Flashes
USING IPOD™
40 En
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 18), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
Supported iPod
iPod (Click and Wheel)
iPod nano
iPod mini
Battery charge feature
Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on.
Stationing your iPod to the Yamaha iPod universal dock
Once you station your iPod to the Yamaha iPod universal dock, “iPod connected” and the DOCK indicator appears in the
front panel display when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source.
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. Refer to the instruction manuals of your iPod for the operations on your
iPod.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 58.
Using iPod™
Controls and functions for iPod™
Notes
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DE
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
V-AUX/DOCK
MENUTITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
REC
V-AUX/DOCK
Select “V-AUX” or “DOCK” as the input source.
MENU/Cursor buttons (k/n/l/h)/ENTER
Navigate the menu of your iPod.
• Press
H
MENU or
7
l to move to the previous
menu level.
• Press
7
k/n to move to the upper/lower menu
level.
• Press
7
ENTER or
7
h to move to the
subsequent menu, start playback of the selected
menu level, or change the selected setting.
Playback control buttons
Control the playback of the connected iPod.
p/e: Play/pause
s: Stop
w/f: Search backward/forward
b/a: Skip backward/forward
USING BLUETOOTH™ COMPONENTS
41 En
English
BASIC
OPERATION
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and
enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between
this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth adapter and your
Bluetooth component in advance.
Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth
component with the Bluetooth adapter connected to this
unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been
deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a
Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.
y
• You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you
use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter.
• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other
component with which Bluetooth communications are to be
established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s
operating instructions.
There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START
PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing.
■ Pairing by using “SET MENU”
Use this feature to perform pairing with the video monitor.
Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU”. See
page 50 for details.
■ Quick pairing
1 Press
4
AMP and then press
N
INPUT l /
h repeatedly (or press
3
V-AUX/DOCK) to
select “V-AUX” as the input source.
2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with.
3 Press and hold
C
BAND (or
6
BAND) for 3
seconds.
Once the Bluetooth adapter starts pairing,
“Searching...” appears for a moment. While the
Bluetooth adapter is in the pairing mode, DOCK
indicator flashes in the front panel display.
y
To cancel the pairing, press
C
BAND (or
6
BAND) again.
If the Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears in the front
panel display.
4 Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth adapter.
If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth
adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in
the Bluetooth device list.
5 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth
device list and then enter the pass key
“0000” to the Bluetooth component.
When the pairing procedure is successful,
“Completed” appears in the front panel display.
The Yamaha Bluetooth adapter can be paired with up to eight
other components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a
ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing
data for the least recently used other component is cleared.
1 Press
4
AMP and then press
N
INPUT l /
h repeatedly (or press
3
V-AUX/DOCK) to
select “V-AUX” as the input source.
2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component.
When the connected Bluetooth adapter detects the
Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the
DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display.
y
• When you press
7
ENTER on the remote control, the
connected Bluetooth adapter searches and connect to the last
connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth adapter
cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in
the front panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth adapter from the Bluetooth
component, press
8
RETURN.
Using Bluetooth™ components
Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter
and your Bluetooth™ component
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the
pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully
understand all the instructions before starting.
Note
Note
Playback of the Bluetooth™
component
RECORDING
42 En
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 31) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 32) and the sound field programs
(see page 34) do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot be recorded.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if
your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source.
• A given input source is not output on the same AUDIO OUT (REC) channel.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is
turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Press
N
INPUT
l / h repeatedly (or press
one of the input selector buttons (
3
)) to
select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
Recording
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
Set menu
43 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can use the following parameters in set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit
operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 22).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
Set menu
Parameter Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover
frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals.
45
B)SP LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
46
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the distance of each speaker.
47
D)CENTER GEQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
47
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
47
F)D.RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
47
G)AUDIO SET
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay settings, maximum volume level and initial volume
level.
48
Parameter Features Page
A)INPUT ASSIGN
Assigns the input jacks on this unit according to the component to be used.
48
B)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input source.
49
C)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
49
D)DECODER MODE
Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the
rear panel of this unit.
49
E)MULTI CH SET
Select the video source played in the background of the sources in put from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
49
44 En
Set menu
Option menu 3 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 32).
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
You can change the set menu parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
1 Press
4
AMP and then press
H
MENU on
the remote control.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
2 Press
7
k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
3 Press
7
ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
“1 SOUND MENU” appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press
7
k / n repeatedly and then press
7
ENTER to select and enter the desired
menu.
The following menus appear in the front panel
display as you press
7
k / n repeatedly.
5 Press
7
k / n repeatedly and then press
7
ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
• Repeat this step to navigate to and enter the items
you want to adjust.
• To return to the previous menu level, press
8
RETURN.
6 Press
7
k / n to select the desired parameter
and then
7
l / h to change the parameter
value.
•Press
7
h to increase the value.
•Press
7
l to decrease the value.
7 Press
H
MENU to exit from set menu.
Parameter Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display.
50
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other set menu settings.
50
C)AUDIO SELECT
Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources connected
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
50
D)PARAM. INI
Sets all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings.
50
E)BLUETOOTH
Pairs the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a
Bluetooth component (see page 41).
50
Using set menu
BASIC SETUP
.
MANUAL SETUP
.
1 SOUND MENU
1 SOUND MENU
2 INPUT MENU
3 OPTION MENU
45 En
Set menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using
LCD monitors or projectors.
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the FRONT B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on and off
when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main zone.
• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the
FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If FRONT
A is turned off and FRONT B is turned on, all the
speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are
muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B
terminals only.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the
sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B
terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”.
• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to
“ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA
DSP mode (see page 36).
Front speakers FRONT
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
When the front speakers are large
Select “LARGE” (large).
When the front speakers are small
Select “SMALL” (small).
When “BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 46), you can
select only “LARGE” in “FRONT”. If the value of “FRONT” is
set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit
automatically changes the value to “LARGE”.
Center speaker CENTER
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
When the center speaker is large
Select “LRG” (large).
When the center speaker is small
Select “SML” (small).
When you do not use the center speaker
Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are
directed to the front left and right speakers.
Surround left/right speakers SUR. LR
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
When the surround speakers are large
Select “LRG” (large).
When the surround speakers are small
Select “SML” (small).
When you do not use the surround speakers
Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode (see page 36).
1 SOUND MENU
Notes
Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger:
large
Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm
(6.5 in): small
Note
46 En
Set menu
LFE/Bass out BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get natural bass sound
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well
as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to
“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get rich bass sound
Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of
any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE
signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to
the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front
left and right channels are directed to the front left and
right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the
“FRONT” setting (see page 45).
When you do not use a subwoofer
Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the
low-frequency signals of the front left and right
channels, and the low-frequency signals of other
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed
to the front left and right speakers regardless of the
“FRONT” setting (see page 45).
Crossover CROSSOVER
Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 44 and 45). All frequencies
below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer
or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 44 and 45).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: NRM, REV
• Select “NRM” if you do not want to reverse the phase
of your subwoofer.
• Select “REV” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer.
■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each
speaker.
Control range: –10 to +10 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of
the speakers.
SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker
FL
Front left speaker
FR
Front right speaker
C
Center speaker
SL
Surround left speaker
SR
Surround right speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
Note
47 En
Set menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)
[Other models]: meters (m)
• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Initial setting:
FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)
SUR. L/SUR. R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of
the speakers.
■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band
(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You
can make adjustments while listening to the currently
selected source component or a test tone.
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
y
Press
7
k / n to select a frequency band and
7
l / h to adjust
the selected frequency band.
Following is an example where “100Hz” is selected as the
frequency band.
Test tone TEST
Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”
while listening to a test tone.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
selected source component.
• Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and
front left speakers.
■ Low-frequency effect level
E)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity
of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel
carries low-frequency special effects which are only added
to certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input
signal contains the LFE channel.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Speaker LFE SP LFE
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Headphone LFE HP LFE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “BASS OUT” (see page 46), some
signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack.
■ Dynamic range F)D.RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
Speaker dynamic range SP D.R
Adjusts the speaker compression.
Headphone dynamic range HP D.R
Adjusts the headphone compression.
SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
Note
Note
100Hz--||-- 0
48 En
Set menu
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Mute type MUTE TYP.
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 30).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
output.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay A.DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 160 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This
feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by
mistake. For example, the original volume range is
+16 dB to –80 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to
–5 dB, the volume range becomes –5 dB to –80 dB.
Control range: +16 dB, +10 dB to –30 dB
Control step: 5 dB
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume”
setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX
VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to
–30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.
Initial volume INI.VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of
this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16 dB
Control step: 1 dB
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.”
setting.
Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the input
mode or rename the input source.
■ Input assignment
A)INPUT ASSIGN
Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the
component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do
not correspond to your needs. Change the following
parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively
connect more components.
Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using
N
INPUT l / h (or
the input selector buttons (
3
) on the remote control).
For DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jacks 1
IN (1)
Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
For DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL jacks 2 and 3
IN (2)
IN (3)
Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
• You cannot select a specific item more than once.
• You cannot assign the same input source to both “IN (2)” and
“IN (3)”. For example, you assign “CD” to “IN (2)”, “–––”
appears in “IN (3)”.
Note
Note
2 INPUT MENU
Notes
49 En
Set menu
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the front panel display.
The following is an example where “DVD” is renamed
“My DVD”.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons (
3
)
or
B
MULTI CH IN to select the input
source you want to change the name of.
2 Press
4
AMP and then press
7
l / h on the
remote control to place the “_” (underscore)
under the space or the character you want to
edit.
3 Press
7
k / n to select the character you
want to use and then press
7
l / h to move
to the next space.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press
7
n to change the character in the following order,
or press
7
k to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,
*, –, +, etc.)
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
5 Press
H
MENU to exit from “INPUT
RENAME”.
■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Press one of the input selector buttons (
3
) or
B
MULTI CH IN to select the input source you
want to adjust the level.
Choices: CD, TUNER, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX (DOCK), DVR, MULTI CH IN
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE
Decoder select mode
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for
the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks
when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate decoder mode.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder mode used the connected input
source.
DTS decoder prioritize setting
Choices: AUTO, DTS
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD.
■ Multi channel input setup
E)MULTI CH SET
BGV BGV
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
Choices: LAST, DVR, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, DVD
y
Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last
selected video source as the background video source.
Notes
DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
DVD My DVD
MULTI CH IN
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
or
50 En
Set menu
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
Control step: 1
• Press
7
l to make the front panel display dimmer.
• Press
7
h to make the front panel display brighter.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Memory guard MEM.GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEM.GUARD” feature.
• Select “ON” to protect:
– sound field program parameters
– all set menu items
– all speaker levels
– SCENE template parameters
When “MEM.GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and
adjust any other set menu items.
■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
select setting for the input sources when you turn on the
power of this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate input mode.
• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last input mode used for the connected input
source (see page 31).
■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field
programs to the initial factory settings.
Choices: NO, YES
• Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and
return to the previous menu level.
• Select “YES” to set all the sound field parameters to
the initial factory settings.
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
■ Bluetooth setting E)BLUETOOTH
Start pairing START PAIRING
Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with
your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing,
refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your
Bluetooth™ component” on page 41.
1 Select “START PAIRING” in “BLUETOOTH”
and then press
7
ENTER to start pairing.
The connected Bluetooth adapter starts searching
Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the
front panel display.
2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects
the Bluetooth adapter.
If the Bluetooth component the Bluetooth adapter,
“YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the
Bluetooth device list.
3 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth
device list and then enter the pass key
“0000” on the Bluetooth component.
Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,
“Completed” appears.
y
To cancel the pairing, press
8
RETURN to exit from
“START PAIRING”.
4 Press
8
RETURN to exit from “START
PAIRING”.
• If the connected Bluetooth adapter cannot find any Bluetooth
components, “Not found” appears.
• If a Bluetooth adapter is not connected to this unit, “No BT
adapter” appears.
3 OPTION MENU
Note
Notes
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read
and fully understand all the instructions before starting.
Notes
Remote control features
51 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 53).
-
■ Controlling this unit
Press
4
AMP to control this unit.
*1
These buttons always control this unit.
*2
These buttons control this unit only when
4
AMP is pressed.
■ Controlling a TV
Press
3
DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your
TV, set the appropriate remote control code for
3
DTV/CBL (see page 53).
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether
you press
3
DTV/CBL or not.
*2
These buttons control your TV only when
3
DTV/CBL is
pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on
page 52.
y
You can control more than one TV by setting the appropriate
remote control code for any input source selector buttons other
than
3
DTV/CBL. In such a case, you can control the buttons
highlighted above (*1 and *2) when you press the input source
selector button.
Remote control features
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DE
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
AMP
*2
*1
*2
Notes
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER
Turns on or off the power.
TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV INPUT
Changes the input source.
TV MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DE
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
DTV/CBL
*2
*1
52 En
Remote control features
■ Controlling other components
Press one of the input selector buttons (
3
) or A to E
buttons to control other components. You must set the
appropriate remote control code for each input source in
advance (see page 53). The following table shows the
function of each control button used to control other
components assigned to each input selector button. Be
advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the
selected component.
y
• The remote control has 13 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 13
different components.
• When you press one of the optional component control area
buttons (A to E), you can control the desired component
without changing the input source of this unit.
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 53).
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DE
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A BC
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
[1]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Remote control
DVD
player/recor
der
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
LD player CD player
MD/CD
recorder
Tuner
[1] AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1
[2] TITLE Title Band
[3] PRESET/CH k Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8)
PRESET/CH n Down
VCR channel
down
Down
Preset down
(1-8)
A/B/C/D/E l Left Left
Preset down
(A-E)
A/B/C/D/E h Right Right
Preset up
(A-E)
ENTER Enter Enter
[4] RETURN Return Return
[5] REC Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec Rec *2 Disc skip Rec
p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play
w
Search
backward
Search backward
Search backward
*2
Search backward Search backward Search backward
f Search forward Search forward
Search forward
*2
Search forward Search forward Search forward
e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause
b Skip backward Skip backward
Skip backward
*2
Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop
[6] 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons
Preset stations
(1-8)
[7] MENU Menu Menu
[8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display
[9] ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index
Notes
53 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
Remote control code default settings
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a
Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case,
try setting another Yamaha remote control code.
1 While pressing and holding one of the input
selector buttons (
3
) on the remote control to
select the input area you want to set up,
press
2
AV POWER for more than 3
seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (
N
) to
enter the four-digit remote control code for
the component to be used.
When the setting succeeds, “RemoteSetup OK”
appears; however, when it dues not, “RemoteSetup
NG” appears in the front panel display.
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the
setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup
procedure.
■ Resetting all remote control codes
Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes
previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory
settings.
1 While pressing and holding
4
AMP, press
2
AV POWER for more than 3 seconds.
2 Press the numeric buttons (
N
) to enter the
code number “9981”.
“RemoteSetup OK” appears in the front panel
display, and the remote control codes previously set
are cleared and reset to the initial factory settings.
y
If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after
step 1, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat
the clearing procedure.
Setting remote control codes
Input
source
Component
category
Manufacturer
Default
code
CD CD Yamaha 5013
MD/CD-R CD-R Yamaha 5001
TUNER TUNER Yamaha 5007
DVD DVD Yamaha 2000
DTV/CBL — — —
V-AUX/D
OCK
TUNER Yamaha 5011
DVR DVR Yamaha 2011
A TUNER Yamaha 5012
B TUNER Yamaha 5009
C TUNER Yamaha 5017
D— ——
E— ——
Note
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DE
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R
TUNER
A BC
POWER
AV
While holding down
Press for 3
seconds
Notes
POWER
AV
AMP
While holding
down
Press for 3
seconds
Advanced setup
54 En
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the
front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers
additional operations to adjust and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold
under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your
listening environment.
•Only
A
STANDBY/ON,
K
PROGRAM
l / h and
L
STRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced
setup menu.
• No other operations can be made while you are using the
advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel
display.
1 Press
A
STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
set this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold
J
TONE CONTROL and
then press
A
STANDBY/ON to turn on this
unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Press
K
PROGRAM
l / h to select the
parameter you want to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
4 Press
L
STRAIGHT repeatedly to change
the selected parameter setting.
5 Press
A
STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN
• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
■ Tuner frequency step TU
(Asia and General models only)
Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South
America.
• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.
■ Initializing PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the set menu parameters. However, the advanced
setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
Advanced setup
Notes
SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level
8ΩMIN
Front (A or B)
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Center
Surround
6ΩMIN
Front (A or B)
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Center
Surround
Notes
Troubleshooting
55 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
12
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
11
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
13-17
No appropriate Audio input jack select has
been set.
Set an appropriate Audio input jack select.
31
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
N
INPUT l / h on the front panel (or the input
selector buttons (
3
) on the remote control).
29, 30
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
11
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with
I
SPEAKERS.
29
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted.
Press
F
MUTE or
I
VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output and then adjust the
volume.
30
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are
not output from any speaker terminals.
Make an analog or digital connection beside the
HDMI connection.
—
The setting of the connected component is
improper.
Make an appropriate setting following the instruction
manual of the connected component.
—
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance setting is correct.
12
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted.
Press
F
MUTE or
I
VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output.
30
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
13-17
Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings.
32
56 En
Troubleshooting
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG”.
45
Some sound field programs do not output
sounds from the center speaker.
Try another sound field program.
34
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. LR” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. LR” to “SML” or “LRG”.
45
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press
L
STRAIGHT on the front panel so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
36
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set
to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Set “BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
46
“BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set
to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Set “BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
46
The source does not contain
low-frequency bass signals.
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
31
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
You are attempting to set the volume level
higher than the maximum volume level.
Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting.
48
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks on this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks on this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
15, 17
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEM.GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is
set to “ON”.
Set “MEM.GUARD” to “OFF”.
50
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
11
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
57 En
Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Tuner
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or
high-frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature is too high and
the overheat protection circuitry has been
activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
19
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
37
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
37
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Set preset stations.
38
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
37
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
58 En
Troubleshooting
■ iPod
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel display, check the connection to your iPod (see
page 18).
■ Bluetooth
Note
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
18
Try resetting your iPod.
—
Unknown iPod
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
—
iPod connected
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
Disconnected
Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10,
sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
18
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Searching...
The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth
component is in the middle of the pairing.
The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth
component is in the middle of establishing
the connection.
Completed
The paring is completed.
Canceled
The paring is canceled.
BT connected
The connection between the Yamaha
Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold
separately) and the Bluetooth component
is established.
Disconnected
The Bluetooth component is disconnected
from the Bluetooth adapter (such as
YBA-10, sold separately).
No BT adapter
The Bluetooth adapter is not connected to
the DOCK terminal.
Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as
YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal.
18
59 En
Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Remote control
■ Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings.
1 Press
A
STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
set this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold
J
TONE CONTROL and
then press
A
STANDBY/ON to turn on this
unit.
The advanced setup menu appears in the front panel
display.
3 Press
K
PROGRAM l / h to select
“PRESET”.
4 Press
L
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“RESET”.
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization
procedure without making any changes.
5 Press
A
STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection and set this unit to the standby
mode.
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the set menu parameters.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making
any changes, press
L
STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“CANCEL” and then press
A
STANDBY/ON.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees
off-axis from the front panel.
21
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
53
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
53
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Notes
Glossary
60 En
■ Audio information
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital
surround in your home. This system produces practically
distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right
and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1
channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels).
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1-channel systems.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of quantized
bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
Glossary
61 En
Glossary
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Sound field program information
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original DSP
technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of
movie theater in the listening room of your own home.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field program so
that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even
without any surround speakers by using virtual surround
speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA
DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not
include a center speaker.
■ Video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P
B
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
Specifications
62 En
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ............................................... 100 W/ch
[Other models]
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ............................................... 100 W/ch
• Maximum Power (JEITA)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ................................................ 135 W/ch
[Asia, China, Korea and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω .................................................135 W/ch
• MAX Power Per Channel
[U.K., Russia, and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................... 105 W or more
• IEC Power
[U.K., Russia, and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.1% THD, 6 Ω ........................................ 90 W or more
• Dynamic Power
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (Impedance Selector: 8 Ω)
(IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) ......................................... 110/130/160/180 W
[Other models]
(IHF, 6/4/2 Ω) .................................................... 105/130/150 W
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω ..................................................................................... 0.41 dB
• Frequency Response
CD, etc. to Front ................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, 0/–3 dB
V-AUX to Front .................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, 0/–3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. (2ch stereo) to Front SP OUT,
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
1 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω ................................................... 0.06% or less
[Other models]
1 kHz, 50 W/6 Ω ................................................... 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD, etc. (STEREO) Input shorted
250 mV................................................................ 100 dB or more
200 mV.................................................................. 98 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ................................................................ 170 µV or less
• Channel Separation
CD, etc. Input 5.1 kΩ shorted (1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control
BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 200 mV, 8 Ω).................................... 0.4 V/470 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
CD, etc. 1 kHz, 0.5%THD (EFFECT ON) ............. 2.0 V or more
• Output Level/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
(2ch Stereo and FRONT SP: SMALL) .................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Video Maximum Input Level.................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................. 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component Signal ................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5%
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... 240 V AC, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... 220 V AC, 60 Hz
[China model] .................................................... 220 V AC, 50 Hz
[U.K., Russia, and Europe models] .....................230 V AC, 50 Hz
[Asia and General models]
............................................. 110-120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 240 W/320 VA
[Other models] .................................................................... 240 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[Except Asia and General models] ...................................... 0.8 W
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models]
5ch, 10%/THD ................................................................. 530 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 151 x 318 mm
(17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 12-1/2”)
• Weight .............................................................. 8.0 kg (17 lbs 10 oz)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
INDEX
63 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Numerics
1 SOUND MENU .......................... 43, 45
2 INPUT MENU ............................ 43, 48
2ch Stereo ............................................ 34
3 OPTION MENU ......................... 44, 50
5ch Stereo ............................................ 34
■ A
A)DISPLAY SET ................................ 50
A)INPUT ASSIGN .............................. 48
A)SPEAKER SET ............................... 45
A.DELAY ............................................ 48
Adjusting speaker levels
during playback ............................... 32
Adjusting the tonal quality ................... 31
AM tuning ............................................ 37
ANTENNA terminals ............................ 9
Audio cable plugs ................................ 13
Audio delay .......................................... 48
AUDIO jacks ................................... 9, 13
Audio jacks .......................................... 13
AUDIO SELECT ................................. 31
Audio select ......................................... 50
Audio settings ...................................... 48
Automatic preset tuning ....................... 38
Automatic tuning ................................. 37
■ B
B)INPUT RENAME ............................ 49
B)MEMORY GUARD ........................ 50
B)SP LEVEL ....................................... 46
BASIC SETUP .............................. 22, 43
Basic setup ........................................... 43
BASS OUT .......................................... 46
BGV ..................................................... 49
Bluetooth setting .................................. 50
Bluetooth status message ..................... 58
BT connected,
Bluetooth status message ................. 58
■ C
C)AUDIO SELECT ............................. 50
C)SP DISTANCE ................................ 47
C)VOLUME TRIM ............................. 49
Canceled,
Bluetooth status message ................. 58
CD Listening ........................................ 26
CD Music Listening ............................. 26
CENTER .............................................. 45
Center graphic equalizer ...................... 47
Center speaker ...................................... 45
Center width ......................................... 35
CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 20
Completed,
Bluetooth status message ................. 58
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .......... 9, 13
Connect error,
iPod controlling status message ....... 58
Connecting a
cable TV/satellite tuner .................... 15
Connecting a CD player .......................17
Connecting a CD player and a
CD recorder/MD recorder ................17
Connecting a DVD player ....................15
Connecting a DVD recorder .................15
Connecting a video monitor .................15
Connecting audio components .............17
Connecting speakers .............................11
Connecting the AM antennas ...............19
Connecting the FM antennas ................19
Connecting the power cable .................19
Connecting the
Yamaha Bluetooth adapter ...............18
Connecting the
Yamaha iPod universal dock ...........18
Connecting to the
CENTER terminals ..........................12
Connecting to the
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..........16
Connecting to the
FRONT A terminals .........................12
Connecting to the
FRONT B terminals .........................12
Connecting to the HDMI or
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..........16
Connecting to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks ................17
Connecting to the
SURROUND terminals ....................12
Connecting to the
VIDEO AUX jacks ..........................18
Connecting video components .............15
Controlling a TV ..................................51
Controlling other components ..............52
Creating original SCENE templates .....27
CROSSOVER ......................................46
Crossover ..............................................46
CT WIDTH ..........................................35
■ D
D)CENTER GEQ .................................47
D)DECODER MODE ..........................49
D)PARAM. INI ....................................50
Decoder indicator .................................20
Decoder mode ......................................49
Decoder select mode ............................49
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL jacks ..............................13
DIGITAL AUDIO
OPTICAL jacks ...............................13
DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL assignment .....................48
DIGITAL INPUT jacks ..........................9
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL assignment ......................48
DIMENSION .......................................35
Dimension ............................................35
DIMMER .............................................50
Dimmer ................................................50
Disc Listening ......................................26
Disconnected,
Bluetooth status message ................ 58
Disconnected,
iPod controlling status message ...... 58
Display settings ................................... 50
DOCK indicator,
Front panel display .......................... 20
DSP LEVEL ........................................ 35
DSP level ............................................. 35
DTS decoder prioritize setting ............. 49
DVD Live Viewing ............................. 26
DVD Movie Viewing .......................... 26
DVD Viewing ...................................... 26
DVR Viewing ...................................... 26
Dynamic range ..................................... 47
■ E
E)BLUETOOTH ................................. 50
E)LFE LEVEL ..................................... 47
E)MULTI CH SET .............................. 49
Editing sound fields parameters .......... 35
ENHANCER indicator ........................ 20
Enjoying 2-channel sources
using the standard decoders ............. 35
Exchanging preset stations .................. 39
■ F
F)D.RANGE ........................................ 47
FM tuning ............................................ 37
FRONT ................................................ 45
FRONT B ............................................ 45
FRONT B speaker setting ................... 45
Front panel display .............................. 20
Front speakers ...................................... 45
■ G
G)AUDIO SET .................................... 48
Game .................................................... 34
Game Playing ...................................... 26
■ H
Hall ...................................................... 34
HDMI .................................................. 14
HDMI jack, HDMI cable plug ............. 14
Headphone dynamic range .................. 47
Headphone LFE ................................... 47
Headphones indicator .......................... 20
HP D.R ................................................ 47
HP LFE ................................................ 47
■ I
Infrared window .................................. 21
INI.VOL. ............................................. 48
Initial volume ....................................... 48
Initializing ............................................ 54
Input assignment .................................. 48
Input channel and
speaker indicators ............................ 20
Input channel indicators ...................... 20
Input menu ........................................... 43
Input rename ........................................ 49
Index
Index
64 En
Input source indicators ......................... 20
Input source information ...................... 32
Installing batteries in the
remote control .................................... 3
iPod connected,
iPod controlling status message ....... 58
iPod control, Status message ............... 58
■ J
Jazz ....................................................... 34
■ L
LFE indicator ....................................... 20
LFE/Bass out ........................................ 46
Listening to unprocessed
input signals ..................................... 36
Low-frequency effect level .................. 47
■ M
Manual preset tuning ........................... 38
MANUAL SETUP ............................... 43
Manual setup ........................................ 43
Manual tuning ...................................... 37
MAX VOL. .......................................... 48
Maximum volume ................................ 48
MEM.GUARD ..................................... 50
Memory guard ...................................... 50
Movie Dramatic ................................... 34
Movie Spacious .................................... 34
MULTI CH INPUT jacks ...................... 9
Multi channel input setup .................... 49
Multi-channel sources and sound field
programs with headphones .............. 36
Multi-information display .................... 20
Music Disc Listening ........................... 26
Music Enh. 2ch .................................... 34
Music Enh. 5ch .................................... 34
MUTE indicator ................................... 20
MUTE TYP. ......................................... 48
Mute type ............................................. 48
■ N
NIGHT indicator .................................. 20
Night listening mode ............................ 31
No BT adapter,
Bluetooth status message ................. 58
■ O
Option menu ........................................ 44
■ P
Pairing, Bluetooth control .................... 41
PANORAMA ....................................... 35
Panorama ............................................. 35
Parameter initialization ........................ 50
PCM indicator ...................................... 20
Placing speakers ................................... 10
Playing video sources in the
background ...................................... 33
Pop/Rock .............................................. 34
PRESET ............................................... 54
Preset SCENE templates ...................... 26
■ R
Radio Listening .................................... 26
Rear panel ..............................................9
Remote control codes ........................... iii
Resetting the system .............................59
■ S
SCENE ...................................................7
Searching...,
Bluetooth status message .................58
Selecting audio input jacks ..................31
Selecting preset stations .......................39
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component as the input source .........30
Selecting the night listening mode .......31
Selecting the SCENE templates ...........24
Set menu ...............................................43
Set this unit to the standby mode .........19
Setting input source of the customized SCENE
template on the remote control
.............28
Setting remote control codes ................53
Setting the speaker impedance .............12
SIGNAL INFO .....................................44
Signal information ................................44
SILENT CINEMA ...............................36
SILENT CINEMA indicator ................20
SLEEP indicator ...................................20
Sleep timer ...........................................33
Sound field programs ...........................34
Sound menu ..........................................43
SP A B indicators .................................20
SP D.R ..................................................47
SP IMP. ................................................54
SP LFE .................................................47
Speaker distance ...................................47
Speaker distances .................................47
Speaker dynamic range ........................47
Speaker impedance ..............................54
Speaker level ........................................46
Speaker LFE .........................................47
Speaker settings ....................................45
SPEAKERS terminals ............................9
Specifications .......................................62
START PAIRING ................................50
Start pairing, .........................................50
Straight mode .......................................36
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack ...............9
Subwoofer phase ..................................46
Supplied accessories ..............................3
SUR. LR ...............................................45
Surround left/right speakers .................45
SWFR PHASE .....................................46
■ T
TEST ....................................................47
Test tone ...............................................47
Troubleshooting ...................................55
TU ........................................................54
Tuner frequency step ............................54
Tuner indicators ...................................20
Turning off the power ..........................19
Turning on the power ...........................19
TV Sports .............................................34
TV Sports Viewing ..............................26
TV Viewing ..........................................26
■ U
UNIT ................................................... 47
Unit ...................................................... 47
Unknown iPod,
iPod controlling status message ...... 58
Using the remote control ..................... 21
Using your headphones ....................... 30
■ V
Video cable plugs ................................ 13
VIDEO jacks ................................... 9, 13
Video jacks .......................................... 13
Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................... 36
VIRTUAL indicator ............................ 20
VOLTAGE SELECTOR ....................... 3
VOLUME level indicator .................... 20
Volume Trim ....................................... 49
■ Z
Zone B ................................................. 30
“ASTANDBY/ON” or “
3
DVD”
(example) indicates the name of the
parts on the front panel or the remote
control. Refer to the attached sheet
or the pages at the end of this manual
for the information about each
position of the parts.
i
■ Front panel
STANDBY
/ON
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A/B/OFF
SILENT CINEMA
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
BAND A/B/C/D/E
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT NIGHT
EFFECT
SCENE
PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
AUDIO SELECT
INPUT
1234
VOLU ME
R
L
AUDIO PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
VIDEO
A
IJKLMNO
BC D E FG H
P
ii
APPENDIX
■ Remote control
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DE
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
1
D
F
E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
iii
List of remote control codes
Blu-ray player
Samsung 2137
CD player
Yamaha 5000, 5013
CD Recorder
Yamaha 5001
DVD
Acoustic Solutions
2078
Aiwa 2055, 2100
Akai 2096
Akura 2076
Alba 2078, 2086
Apex 2027, 2049
Awa 2078
Axion 2078
Brainwave 2096
Brandt 2073, 2085
Broksonic 2060
Bush 2075, 2078, 2112
Centrex 2077
Classic 2078
Clatronic 2075
Coby 2078
C-Tech 2074
CyberHome 2025, 2079, 2091
Daewoo 2092, 2098
Dansai 2096
Daytek 2080, 2089
DEC 2075
Denon 2030, 2102, 2103
Denver 2075, 2076
Diamond 2074
DK Digital 2094
Dual 2078
D-Vision 2096
DVX 2074
Elta 2096
Euroline 2096
Funai 2052, 2058
Global Solutions2074
Global Sphere 2074
Goodmans 2075, 2077, 2078
Grundig 2077, 2098
H&B 2075
Haaz 2074
HE 2078
Hitachi 2032, 2072
Home Electronics
2078
Innovation 2072
Irradio 2134
JDB 2078
JVC 2033, 2045, 2053,
2073, 2099
Kenwood 2030, 2097
Kingavon 2075
Koda 2075
Lawson 2074
Lenco 2075
LG 2084, 2087
Lifetec 2072
Limit 2074
LogicLab 2074
Luxor 2077
Magnavox 2037, 2073, 2075
Magnum 2072
MBO 2078
Medion 2072
Micromaxx 2072
Micromedia 2073
Microstar 2072
Mitsubishi 2035
Mizuda 2075
Mustek 2078
Naiko 2077
Onkyo 2073, 2135
Orava 2075
P&B 2075
Pacific 2074
Panasonic 2030, 2040, 2054,
2057, 2105, 2110
Philips 2019, 2026, 2046,
2073, 2081, 2090
Pioneer 2036, 2082
Proline 2077
Provision 2075
RCA 2031, 2042, 2050,
2051
Red Star 2076
Reoc 2074
Roadstar 2075, 2078, 2086
Rowa 2077
Saba 2085
Sabaki 2074
Samsung 2032, 2041, 2104,
2113
Sansui 2074
Sanyo 2095
ScanMagic 2078
Scientific Labs 2074
Scott 2088
SEG 2074, 2086
Sharp 2034, 2043, 2059,
2093, 2106
Silva 2076
Singer 2074
Skymaster 2074, 2078
Skyworth 2076
SM Electronic 2074, 2078
Sony 2028, 2029, 2039,
2083, 2107
Soundmaster 2074
Soundmax 2074
Standard 2074
Star Cluster 2074
Starmedia 2075
Supervision 2074, 2078
Sylvania 2052, 2058
Synn 2074
TCM 2072
Teac 2074
Tec 2076
Technics 2030
Technika 2096
Technosonic 2096
Tevion 2072, 2074
Thomson 2085, 2109
Tokai 2076
Toshiba 2026, 2044, 2048,
2056, 2073, 2108,
2111
United 2078
Voxson 2078
Wharfedale 2074
Xlogic 2074
Yakumo 2077
Yamada 2077
Yamaha 2000, 2001, 2003,
2030, 2101
Yukai 2078
Zenith 2038, 2047, 2073
DVD Recorder
Apex 2024
JVC 2070
LG 2071
Panasonic 2020, 2065, 2066,
2067
Philips 2019, 2061, 2062,
2063
Pioneer 2021
RCA 2018
Sony 2022, 2064
Toshiba 2068
Yamaha 2023
Yukai 2069
DVD/LD
Pioneer 2036
DVD/VCR
JVC 1017, 2045
LG 1071, 2087
Panasonic 1020, 1072, 2040,
2105
Philips 1025
RCA 1022, 2042
Samsung 1021, 2041, 2104
Sharp 1023, 1073, 2043,
2106
Sony 1019, 1074, 2039,
2107
Toshiba 1024, 1075, 2044,
2108
Zenith 1026, 2047
DVD-DVR
Panasonic 2067
Pioneer 2114
Samsung 2115
Toshiba 2068
DVR
ABS 2132
Alienware 2132
CyberPower 2132
Dell 2132
DIRECTV 2123, 2128, 2129,
2133
DISH Network 2126, 2127
Dishpro 2126
Echostar 2126, 2127
Expressvu 2126
Gateway 2132
GOI 2126
Hewlett Packard 2132
Hitachi 2008
Howard Computers
2132
HTS 2126
Hughes 2123, 2128
Humax 2123
Hush 2132
iBUYPOWER 2132
JVC 2126, 2127
Linksys 2132
Media Center PC
2132
Microsoft 2132
Mind 2132
Niveus Media 2132
Northgate 2132
Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017,
2120
Philips 2117, 2121, 2123,
2128
Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014
Proscan 2129
RCA 2116, 2124, 2129,
2133
ReplayTV 2118, 2119, 2120
Sharp 2009, 2010
Sonic Blue 2119, 2120
Sony 2005, 2006, 2007,
2122, 2130, 2131,
2132
Stack 10 2132
Stack 9 2132
Systemax 2132
Tagar Systems 2132
Tivo 2116, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2130, 2131
Toshiba 2004, 2125, 2132
Touch 2132
UltimateTV 2133
Viewsonic 2132
Voodoo 2132
Yamaha 2011
ZT Group 2132
HD DVD
Toshiba 2136
iPod
Yamaha 5011
LD player
Yamaha 2002
MD
Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004
TAPE DECK
Yamaha 5005, 5006
TUNER
Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009,
5010, 5012, 5014,
5015, 5016, 5017,
5018
TV
Acer 0093
Acme 0207
Acura 0208
ADA 0255
ADC 0206
Admiral 0058, 0205, 0206,
0210, 0211
Adyson 0200, 0207
Agashi 0200
Agazi 0206
AGB 0204
Aiko 0127, 0200, 0207,
0208
Aiwa 0028, 0139, 0229,
0237
iv
APPENDIX
Akai 0059, 0065, 0127,
0129, 0130, 0200,
0204, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218,
0255
Akiba 0209, 0218
Akura 0206, 0209, 0218
Alaron 0200
Alba 0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0217, 0218
ALBIRAL 0212
Allstar 0213
Amplivision 0207
Amstrad 0204, 0206, 0208,
0209, 0218
Amtron 0062
Anam 0208
Anam National 0062
Anglo 0208
Anitech 0206, 0208
Ansonic 0203, 0208
AOC 0060, 0061
Apex 0118, 0122, 0132
Arc en Ciel 0216
Arcam 0200
Arcam Delta 0207
Aristona 0213, 0217
ASA 0205, 0211
Asberg 0213
Astra 0208
Asuka 0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
Atlantic 0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
Atori 0208
Audiosonic 0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0216, 0217,
0218
AudioTon 0207
Audiovox 0062
Autovox 0205, 0206, 0207
Awa 0200
Baird 0216
Bang & Olufsen 0205
Basic Line 0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
Bastide 0207
Baur 0217
Beko 0228
Belcor 0060
Bell & Howell 0058, 0064
Benq 0081
Beon 0213, 0217
Bestar 0213
Binatone 0207
Black Star 0214
Blaupunkt 0255
Blue Sky 0209, 0218
Bondstec 0214
Boots 0207
Bradford 0062
Brandt 0216, 0226
Brionvega 0205, 0213, 0217
Britannia 0200, 0207
Brockwood 0060
Broksonic 0138
Bruns 0205
BSR 0215
BTC 0209, 0218
Bush 0177, 0208, 0209,
0210, 0213, 0215,
0216, 0217, 0218,
0230, 0237
Candle 0060, 0061
Capsonic 0206
Cascade 0208
Cathay 0213, 0217
CCE 0127
Celebrity 0059
Centurion 0213, 0217
Century 0205
CGE 0214, 0215
Cimline 0208, 0218
Citizen 0060, 0061, 0062,
0064
City 0208
Clarivox 0212, 0217
Clatronic 0206, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0213, 0214,
0218
CMS 0200
Colortyme 0060, 0061
Concerto 0060, 0061
Concorde 0208
Condor 0200, 0207, 0213
Contec 0200, 0207, 0208
Contec/Cony 0062
Continental Edison
0216
Cosmel 0208
Craig 0062
Crosley 0205, 0214, 0215
Crown 0062, 0063, 0128,
0208, 0213, 0217
CS Electronics 0200, 0207, 0209,
0214, 0218
CTC 0214
Curtis Mathes 0057, 0060, 0061,
0064, 0065
CXC 0062
Cybertron 0209, 0218
Daewoo 0060, 0061, 0120,
0127, 0155, 0193,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0218, 0238
Dainichi 0200, 0209, 0218
Dansai 0200, 0206, 0213,
0217
Dantax 0217
Daytron 0060, 0061, 0208
De Graaf 0210
Decca 0204, 0207, 0213,
0217
Desmet 0213, 0217
Diamond 0200
Dimensia 0057
Dixi 0208, 0213, 0217
DTS 0208
Dual 0207, 0215, 0216
Dual-Tec 0207, 0208, 0215
Dumont 0060, 0127, 0205,
0207
Durabrand 0126
Dux 0217
Dynatron 0213, 0217
Elbe 0203, 0204, 0212,
0218
Elbe-Sharp 0204
Elcit 0204, 0205
ELECTRO TECH
0208
Electroband 0059
Electrohome 0059, 0060, 0061
Elin 0200, 0207, 0213,
0217
Elite 0209, 0213, 0218
Elman 0215
Elta 0200, 0208
Emerson 0060, 0061, 0062,
0064, 0128, 0205
Envision 0060, 0061
Erres 0213, 0217
ESA 0080
Etron 0208
Euro-Feel 0206
Euroline 0217
Euroman 0200
Euromann 0206, 0207, 0213
Europhon 0200, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0215
Fenner 0208
Ferguson 0212, 0217, 0226
Fidelity 0200, 0207, 0210
Finlandia 0210
Finlux 0204, 0205, 0207,
0213, 0215, 0217
Firstline 0200, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214
Fisher 0064, 0127, 0128,
0205, 0207, 0215
Flint 0213, 0218
Formenti 0200, 0205, 0207,
0215, 0217
Formenti-Phoenix
0200
Fortress 0205
Frontech 0206, 0208, 0210,
0211, 0214
Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025,
0088, 0127
Funai 0033, 0034, 0035,
0036, 0037, 0062,
0206
Futuretech 0062
Gateway 0094
GBC 0208, 0215, 0218
GE 0057, 0060, 0061,
0122, 0147
GEC 0204, 0207, 0211,
0213, 0217
Geloso 0208, 0210, 0215
General Technic 0208
Genexxa 0209, 0211, 0213,
0218
Gibralter 0060
GoldHand 0200
GoldStar 0060, 0061, 0127,
0128, 0200, 0201,
0207, 0208, 0210,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
Goodmans 0171, 0201, 0204,
0206, 0208, 0213,
0217, 0240
GPM 0209, 0218
Graetz 0211
Granada 0204, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217
Grandin 0208, 0209, 0217
Grundig 0128, 0130, 0222,
0236, 0255
Grunpy 0062
Halifax 0200, 0206, 0207
Hallmark 0060, 0061
Hampton 0200, 0207
Hanseatic 0203, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0215, 0217
Hantarex 0204, 0208
Harvard 0062
HCM 0206, 0207, 0208,
0218
Hifivox 0216
Higashi 0200
Hinari 0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
Hisawa 0209, 0218
Hitachi 0006, 0014, 0015,
0016, 0042, 0060,
0061, 0095, 0105,
0127, 0156, 0179,
0180, 0204, 0207,
0210, 0211, 0215,
0216, 0251
Hornyphon 0213
Hoshai 0209, 0218
Huanyu 0200, 0207
Hygashi 0200, 0207
Hyper 0200, 0207, 0208,
0214, 0215
Hypson 0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
ICE 0127, 0200, 0206,
0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
ICeS 0200, 0218
IMA 0062
Imperial 0211, 0213, 0214,
0215
Indiana 0213, 0217
Infinity 0063
Ingelen 0211
Ingersol 0208
Inno Hit 0201, 0204, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
Innovation 0206, 0208
Interbuy 0208, 0214
Interfunk 0205, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0216, 0217
International 0200
Intervision 0206, 0207, 0218
Irradio 0201, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0217, 0218
Isukai 0209, 0218
ITC 0207, 0215
ITS 0200, 0209, 0213,
0218
ITT 0129, 0208, 0211
ITV 0208, 0217
JBL 0063
JC Penney 0057, 0060, 0061
JCB 0059
Jensen 0060, 0061
JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,
0108, 0136, 0153,
0178, 0190, 0213,
0218
Kaisui 0200, 0207, 0208,
0209, 0218
Kamosonic 0207
Kamp 0200, 0207
Kapsch 0211
Karcher 0207, 0208, 0212,
0217
Kawasho 0059, 0060, 0061,
0200
Kendo 0128, 0210
Kennedy 0215
Kenwood 0060, 0061
Kingsley 0200, 0207
Kloss Novabeam
0062
Kneissel 0203
Kolster 0213
Konka 0209, 0218
Korpel 0213, 0217
Korting 0205
Koyoda 0208
KTV 0062, 0127, 0207
Kyoto 0200, 0212
v
Lenco 0208
Lenoir 0207, 0208
Lesa 0214
Leyco 0206, 0213, 0217
LG 0016, 0038, 0039,
0127, 0128, 0157,
0158, 0163, 0164,
0166, 0188, 0189,
0200, 0201, 0207,
0208, 0210, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
Liesenk 0217
Life 0206, 0208
Lifetec 0206, 0208, 0218
Loewe 0063, 0128, 0203,
0204, 0223, 0227
Loewe Opta 0205, 0213, 0217
Logik 0058
Luma 0210, 0217
Lumatron 0210, 0213, 0217
Lux May 0213
Luxman 0060, 0061
Luxor 0201, 0207, 0210
LXI 0057, 0061, 0063,
0064
Magnadyne 0204, 0205, 0214,
0215, 0217
Magnafon 0200, 0204, 0207
Magnavox 0060, 0061, 0063,
0102, 0103, 0150
Magnum 0206, 0208
Majestic 0058
Mandor 0206
Manesth 0206, 0207, 0213,
0217
Marantz 0060, 0061, 0063,
0090, 0213, 0217
Marelli 0205
Mark 0200, 0213, 0217
Matsui 0204, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0213, 0217
Mediator 0213, 0217
Medion 0206, 0208
Megatron 0061
Melectronic 0200, 0207, 0208,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217
Memorex 0058, 0061, 0064,
0208
Memphis 0208
Metz 0205
MGA 0060, 0061
Micromaxx 0206, 0208
Microstar 0206, 0208
Minerva 0204
Minoka 0213
Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016,
0048, 0060, 0061,
0104, 0112, 0113,
0125, 0205, 0213
Mivar 0200, 0201, 0202,
0203, 0204, 0207
Montgomery Ward
0058
MTC 0060, 0061, 0128,
0200
Multi System 0217
Multitech 0062, 0127, 0128,
0200, 0207, 0208,
0210, 0214, 0215,
0217
Murphy 0200, 0207
NAD 0061
Naonis 0210
NEC 0026, 0053, 0060,
0061, 0096, 0127
Neckermann 0205, 0207, 0210,
0213, 0217, 0255
NEI 0213, 0217
Nesco 0214
NET-TV 0082, 0101
New Tech 0208, 0213
New World 0209, 0218
Nicamagic 0200, 0207
Nikkai 0200, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0213, 0217,
0218
Nikko 0061
Nobliko 0200, 0207
Nogamatic 0216
Nokia 0129, 0211
Nordmende 0205, 0211, 0213,
0216
Nordvision 0217
Oceanic 0211
Olevia 0084
ONCEAS 0207
Onwa 0062, 0218
Orbit 0213
Orion 0126, 0204, 0208,
0213, 0217, 0235
Orline 0218
Orsowe 0204
Osaki 0127, 0206, 0207,
0209, 0218
Osio 0201
Oso 0209, 0218
Osume 0218
Otto Versand 0204, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0255
Pael 0200, 0207
Palladium 0207
Panama 0200, 0206, 0207,
0208
Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0063,
0073, 0074, 0097,
0110, 0114, 0137,
0141, 0151, 0162,
0165, 0186, 0204,
0211, 0244, 0245,
0246, 0254
Pathe Cinema 0200, 0203, 0207,
0212, 0215
Pathe Marconi 0212, 0216
Pausa 0208
Perdio 0200
Philco 0060, 0061, 0063,
0128, 0205, 0214,
0215
Philharmonic 0207
Philips 0040, 0060, 0063,
0072, 0115, 0116,
0124, 0130, 0150,
0175, 0184, 0187,
0205, 0207, 0213,
0215, 0217, 0220,
0221, 0232, 0233,
0252, 0253
Philips Magnavox
0124
Phoenix 0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
Phonola 0200, 0205, 0213,
0217
Pilot 0060
Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0060,
0061, 0098, 0109,
0117, 0128, 0181,
0182, 0194, 0195,
0211, 0213, 0216,
0217, 0250
Plantron 0206, 0213
Polaroid 0075
Poppy 0208
Portland 0060, 0061
Prandoni-Prince 0204, 0210
Precision 0207
Prima 0208, 0211
Profex 0208
Profi-Tronic 0213
Proline 0213
Proscan 0057
Prosonic 0200, 0207, 0217
Protech 0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
Proton 0060, 0061
Provision 0217
Pulsar 0060
Pye 0213, 0217
Pymi 0208
Quasar 0152, 0214
Quelle 0201, 0206, 0207,
0213, 0214, 0215,
0217
Radialva 0218
Radio Shack 0064
Radio Shack/Realistic
0057, 0060, 0061,
0062, 0064
Radiola 0213, 0217
Radiomarelli 0204, 0205, 0214
Radiotone 0213
RCA 0057, 0060, 0061,
0091, 0133, 0135,
0147, 0149
Realistic 0064
Revox 0213, 0217
Rex 0206, 0210, 0211
RFT 0203, 0205
Rhapsody 0200
R-Line 0213, 0217
Roadstar 0206, 0208, 0209,
0218, 0237
Robotron 0205
Rowa 0200
RTF 0205
Saba 0204, 0205, 0211,
0216
saccs 0212
Saisho 0204, 0206, 0207,
0208
Salora 0201, 0204, 0210,
0211, 0215
Sambers 0204
Sampo 0060, 0061, 0083,
0101
Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031,
0032, 0044, 0045,
0046, 0047, 0060,
0061, 0065, 0068,
0069, 0071, 0079,
0087, 0127, 0128,
0130, 0144, 0160,
0161, 0170, 0176,
0183, 0185, 0200,
0201, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0213, 0217,
0239, 0241, 0242,
0243
Sandra 0200, 0207
Sansui 0123, 0126, 0213
Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022,
0049, 0060, 0064,
0127, 0128, 0200,
0203, 0207, 0215
SBR 0217
SCHAUB LORENTZ
0211
Schneider 0207, 0209, 0213,
0215, 0216, 0217,
0218
Scotch 0061
Scott 0060, 0061, 0062
Sears 0057, 0060, 0061,
0064
SEG 0200, 0206, 0207,
0214, 0215, 0217
SEI 0204
SEI-Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0211
Seleco 0210, 0211, 0215
Sencora 0208
Sentra 0218
Serino 0200
Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011,
0060, 0061, 0066,
0070, 0087, 0111,
0143, 0145, 0167,
0168, 0169, 0198,
0204, 0224, 0247,
0248, 0249
Shogun 0060
Siarem 0204, 0205, 0215
Sicatel 0212
Siemens 0255
Sierra 0213
Signature 0058
Silva 0200
Singer 0205, 0214, 0215
Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0215,
0217
Skantic 0211
Solavox 0211
Sonoko 0206, 0207, 0208,
0213, 0217
Sonolor 0211
Sontec 0213, 0217
Sony 0041, 0059, 0067,
0085, 0086, 0174,
0196, 0199, 0208,
0219, 0234
Sound & Vision 0209, 0218
Soundesign 0060, 0061, 0062
Soundwave 0213, 0217
SSS 0060, 0062
Standard 0207, 0208, 0209,
0213, 0218
Starlight 0217
Starlite 0062
Stenway 0218
Stern 0210, 0211
Sunkai 0208, 0218
Sunwood 0208, 0213
Superla 0200, 0204, 0207
SuperTech 0200
Supra 0208
Supreme 0059
Susumu 0209
Sutron 0208
Sydney 0200, 0207
Sylvania 0060, 0061, 0063,
0080, 0134, 0142,
0148
Symphonic 0062, 0080
Sysline 0217
Sytong 0200
vi
APPENDIX
Tandy 0127, 0207, 0209,
0211, 0218
Tashiko 0200, 0207, 0210
Tatung 0127, 0204, 0207,
0213, 0217, 0237
TCM 0206, 0208
Teac 0127
Tec 0207, 0208, 0214,
0215
Techwood 0060, 0061
Teknika 0058, 0060, 0061,
0062
Teleavia 0216
Telecor 0218
Telefunken 0065, 0213, 0216
Telegazi 0218
Teletech 0208, 0214, 0217
Teleton 0207
Televideon 0200
Tensai 0208, 0209, 0213,
0218
Tesmet 0213
Tevion 0206, 0208
Texet 0200, 0207
Thomson 0191, 0192, 0207,
0213, 0216, 0226
Thorn 0212, 0217
TMK 0060, 0061
Tokai 0213
Tokyo 0200, 0207
Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053,
0054, 0064, 0078,
0089, 0090, 0106,
0107, 0127, 0131,
0140, 0146, 0159,
0197, 0225, 0231,
0237
Towada 0211, 0215
Transtec 0200
Trident 0204
Tristar 0218
Triumph 0204
Uher 0211, 0213
Ultravox 0200, 0205, 0207,
0214, 0215
United 0217
Universum 0127, 0128, 0129,
0201, 0206, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
Univox 0212
Vestel 0210, 0211, 0213,
0214, 0215, 0217
Vexa 0208, 0217
Victor 0213
VIDEOLOGIC 0200
Videologique 0200, 0207, 0209,
0218
Videosat 0214
VideoSystem 0213
Videotechnic 0200
Vidtech 0060, 0061
Viewsonic 0076, 0077, 0092,
0099, 0172, 0173
Visiola 0200, 0207
Vision 0213
Vortec 0213, 0217
Voxson 0205, 0210, 0211,
0213
Waltham 0207, 0212
Wards 0057, 0058, 0060,
0061, 0063
Watson 0213, 0217, 0218
Watt Radio 0200, 0207, 0212,
0215
Wega 0205
Weltblick 0213, 0217
Weston 0215
White Westinghouse
0200, 0207, 0217
Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0004, 0005,
0060, 0061
Yamishi 0218
Yoko 0200, 0206, 0207,
0208, 0209, 0213,
0217, 0218
Yorx 0209, 0218
Zanussi 0210
Zenith 0058, 0060, 0100,
0105, 0119, 0121,
0154
TV/DVD
Aiwa 0139, 2055
Apex 0132, 2049
Broksonic 0138, 2060
Bush 0230, 2112
JVC 0136, 2053
Panasonic 0137, 0254, 2054,
2110
RCA 0133, 0135, 2050,
2051
Sylvania 0134, 2052
Thomson 0226, 2109
Toshiba 0131, 0231, 2048,
2111
TV/DVD/VCR
Panasonic 0141, 1040, 2057
Samsung 0241, 1070, 2113
Sharp 0143, 1028, 2059
Sylvania 0142, 1041, 2058
Toshiba 0140, 1029, 2056
TV/VCR
Aiwa 0237, 1066
Bush 0237, 1066
Daewoo 0155, 0238, 1038,
1067
GE 0147, 1030
Goodmans 0240, 1069
Grundig 0236, 1062
Hitachi 0156, 1039
JVC 0153, 1036
Magnavox 0150, 1033
Orion 0235, 1065
Panasonic 0151, 1034
Philips 0150, 0232, 0233,
1033, 1062, 1063
Quasar 0152, 1035
RCA 0149, 1032
Roadstar 0237, 1066
Samsung 0144, 0239, 1027,
1068
Sharp 0145, 1028
Sony 0234, 1064
Sylvania 0148, 1031
Tatung 0237, 1066
Toshiba 0146, 0237, 1029,
1066
Zenith 0154, 1037
VCR
Admiral 1008, 1013
Adventura 1005
Aiwa 1005, 1042, 1043,
1044, 1066
Akai 1007, 1043
Akiba 1050
Akura 1043, 1050
Alba 1044, 1050
American High 1004
Amstrad 1042
Anitech 1050
ASA 1045, 1046
Asha 1002, 1014
Asuka 1042, 1045, 1046,
1050
Audio Dynamics1000
Audiovox 1003
Baird 1042, 1043, 1047
Basic Line 1044, 1050
Baur 1046
Beaumark 1002, 1014
Bell & Howell 1001
Blaupunkt 1046, 1048
Broksonic 1012, 1013
Bush 1044, 1050, 1066
Calix 1003
Candle 1002, 1003
Canon 1004
CCE 1006
CGE 1042, 1043
Cimline 1044, 1050
Citizen 1002, 1003
Colortyme 1000
Colt 1006
Craig 1002, 1003, 1006,
1014
Crown 1050
Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002, 1004,
1009
Cybernex 1002, 1014
Daewoo 1005, 1038, 1061,
1067
Dansai 1050
Dantax 1044
DBX 1000
De Graaf 1046, 1049
Decca 1042, 1043, 1046
Denon 1010
Dimensia 1009
Dual 1043, 1046
Dumont 1042, 1046, 1047,
1049
Dynatech 1005
Electrohome 1003
Electrophonic 1003
Elta 1050
Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005,
1012, 1013
Etzuko 1050
Ferguson 1043
Fidelity 1042
Finlandia 1046, 1047, 1049
Finlux 1042, 1043, 1046,
1047, 1049
FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049,
1050
Fisher 1001, 1047
Flint 1044
Formenti/Phoenix
1046
Fuji 1004
Fujitsu 1042
Funai 1005, 1042
Galaxy 1042
Garrard 1005
GBC 1050
GE 1002, 1004, 1009,
1014, 1030
GEC 1046
Geloso 1050
General Technic 1044, 1048
Go Video 1014
GoldHand 1050
Goldstar 1000, 1003, 1042,
1045
Goodmans 1042, 1045, 1050,
1069
Gradiente 1005
Graetz 1043, 1047
Granada 1046, 1047, 1049
Grandin 1042, 1045, 1050
Grundig 1046, 1050, 1062
Hanseatic 1045, 1046
Harley Davidson1005
Harman/Kardon 1000
Harwood 1006
HCM 1050
Headquarter 1001
Hinari 1044, 1050
Hisawa 1044
Hitachi 1007, 1010, 1039,
1042, 1043, 1046,
1049
Hughes Network Systems
1010
Hypson 1044, 1050
Imperial 1042
Inno Hit 1046, 1050
Innovation 1044, 1048
Instant Replay 1004
Interbuy 1045
Interfunk 1046, 1047
Intervision 1042
Irradio 1045, 1050
ITT 1043, 1047
ITV 1045
JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1006
JCL 1004
Jensen 1007
JVC 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1017, 1036,
1043
Kaisui 1050
Karcher 1046
Kendo 1044
Kenwood 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043
KLH 1006
Kodak 1003, 1004
Korpel 1050
Leyco 1050
LG 1003, 1042, 1045,
1071
Lifetec 1044, 1048
Lloyd's 1005
Loewe 1048
Loewe Opta 1045, 1046
Logik 1006, 1050
Luxor 1047
LXI 1003
M Electronic 1042
Magnasonic 1047
Magnavox 1004, 1018, 1033
Magnin 1003, 1014
Manesth 1050
Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004,
1046, 1051
Marta 1003
Matsui 1044, 1045
Matsushita 1004
Mediator 1046
Medion 1044, 1048
MEI 1004
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2008 All rights reserved.
Printed in China
WQ16440
Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008,
1013, 1014, 1042,
1045, 1047
Memphis 1050
Metz 1048
MGA 1014
MGN Technology
1002, 1014
Micromaxx 1044, 1048
Microstar 1044, 1048
Migros 1042
Minolta 1010
Mitsubishi 1011, 1042, 1046
Montgomery Ward
1008
Motorola 1004, 1008
MTC 1002, 1014
Multitech 1002, 1005, 1006,
1042, 1046, 1050
Murphy 1042
National 1048
NEC 1000, 1001, 1007,
1011, 1043, 1051
Neckermann 1043, 1046
NEI 1046
Nesco 1050
Nikko 1003
Noblex 1002, 1014
Nokia 1043, 1047
Nordmende 1043
Oceanic 1042, 1043
Okano 1044
Olympus 1004
Optimus 1003, 1008
Orion 1012, 1013, 1044,
1065
Orson 1042
Osaki 1042, 1045, 1050
Otto Versand 1046
Palladium 1043, 1045, 1050
Panasonic 1004, 1020, 1034,
1040, 1048, 1054,
1072
Pathe Marconi 1043
Penney 1010, 1014
Pentax 1010, 1049
Perdio 1042
Philco 1004, 1051
Philips 1004, 1025, 1033,
1046, 1056, 1057,
1059, 1062, 1063
Philips Magnavox
1018
Phonola 1046
Pilot 1003
Pioneer 1011, 1046
Prinz 1042
Profex 1050
Profitronic 1014
Proline 1042
Proscan 1009
Prosonic 1044
Protec 1006
Pye 1046, 1056
Quarter 1001
Quartz 1001, 1047
Quasar 1004, 1035
Quelle 1042, 1046, 1047
Radio Shack 1003
Radio Shack/Realistic
1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
Radiola 1046
Radix 1003
Randex 1003
RCA 1002, 1004, 1009,
1010, 1014, 1015,
1022, 1032
Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003,
1004, 1005, 1008
Rex 1043
RFT 1046
Roadstar 1045, 1050, 1066
Saba 1043
Saisho 1044, 1050
Salora 1047
Samsung 1002, 1014, 1021,
1027, 1052, 1068,
1070
Sanky 1008
Sansui 1007, 1011, 1013,
1043
Sanyo 1001, 1002, 1014,
1047
SBR 1046
Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047
Schneider 1042, 1044, 1045,
1046, 1050
Scott 1012
Sears 1001, 1003, 1004,
1010
SEG 1050
SEI-Sinudyne 1046
Seleco 1043
Sentron 1050
Sharp 1008, 1023, 1028,
1053, 1073
Shintom 1006, 1047, 1050
Shivaki 1045
Shogun 1002, 1014
Siemens 1045, 1047
Signature 2000 1008
Silva 1045
Singer 1004, 1006
Sinudyne 1046
Sontec 1045
Sony 1016, 1019, 1055,
1060, 1064, 1074
STS 1004, 1010
Sunkai 1044
Sunstar 1042
Suntronic 1042
Sunwood 1050
Sylvania 1004, 1005, 1031,
1041
Symphonic 1005
Taisho 1044
Tandy 1001
Tashiko 1003, 1042
Tatung 1007, 1042, 1043,
1046, 1066
TCM 1044, 1048
Teac 1005, 1007
Technics 1004, 1048
Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005
Teleavia 1043
Telefunken 1043
Tenosal 1050
Tensai 1042, 1045, 1050
Tevion 1044, 1048
Thomson 1043, 1058
Thorn 1043, 1047
TMK 1002, 1014
Tokai 1045, 1050
Tonsai 1050
Toshiba 1013, 1024, 1029,
1043, 1046, 1066,
1075
Totevision 1002, 1003, 1014
Towada 1050
Towika 1050
Uher 1045
Unitech 1002, 1014
Universum 1042, 1045, 1046
Vector Research 1000
Video Concepts 1000
Videon 1044, 1048
Videosonic 1002, 1014
Wards 1002, 1003, 1004,
1005, 1006, 1008,
1010, 1014
Weltblick 1045
White Westinghouse
1013
XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006
Yamaha 1000, 1001, 1007
Yam is hi 10 50
Yokan 1050
Yoko 1045, 1050
Zenith 1013, 1026, 1037
01EN_RX-V363_U_cv-4.fm Page vii Wednesday, April 16, 2008 3:56 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.
Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.
■ Front panel/Face avant
RX-V363
UC
STANDBY
/ON
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A/B/OFF
SILENT CINEMA
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
BAND A/B/C/D/E
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT NIGHT
EFFECT
SCENE
PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L
AUDIO SELECT
INPUT
1234
VOLUME
R
L
AUDIO PORTABLE
VIDEO AUX
VIDEO
A
IJKLMNO
BC D E FG H
P
00_Sheet_RX-V363_U.book Page 1 Sunday, December 2, 2007 8:51 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande
REC
SUR. DECODE
NIGHT
STRAIGHT
MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
ENHANCER
l PROG h
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
TV CH
POWER
AMP
STANDBY
POWER
MUTE
POWER
8
10
7
09
65
4321
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DE
DTV/CBL DVR
CD MD/CD-R TUNER
MENU
VOLUME
TITLE
ENTER
BAND LEVEL
DISPLAY
RETURN
AVTV
SCENE
4321
A B C
1
D
F
E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
WN26250
Printed in China
00_Sheet_RX-V363_U.book Page i Sunday, December 2, 2007 8:51 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
Transcripción de documentos
01EN_RX-V363_U_cv-1.fm Page 1 Friday, May 9, 2008 10:05 AM U RX-V363 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. Caution-i En 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-ii En CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. Caution-iii En 18 Before moving this unit, press ASTANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are 110–120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by ASTANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Contents Features ................................................................... 2 Getting started ........................................................ 3 Quick start guide .................................................... 4 Set menu.................................................................43 Using set menu ........................................................ 44 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 45 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 48 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 50 Remote control features........................................51 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 51 Setting remote control codes ................................... 53 Advanced setup......................................................54 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PREPARATION Connections ............................................................. 9 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) BASIC OPERATION Front panel................................................................i Remote control ....................................................... ii List of remote control codes ................................. iii ADVANCED OPERATION Rear panel .................................................................. 9 Placing speakers....................................................... 10 Connecting speakers ................................................ 11 Setting the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ....................... 12 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13 Information on HDMI™.......................................... 14 Connecting video components................................. 15 Connecting audio components................................. 17 Connecting a Yamaha iPod™ universal dock and Bluetooth™ adapter............................................. 18 Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel............................................................ 18 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 19 Connecting the power cable..................................... 19 Turning on and off the power .................................. 19 Front panel display .................................................. 20 Troubleshooting.....................................................55 Glossary..................................................................60 Specifications .........................................................62 Index .......................................................................63 PREPARATION Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4 Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components............................................................ 6 Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button ........................................... 7 What do you want to do with this unit?..................... 8 ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Basic setup ............................................................. 22 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 24 Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 24 Creating your original SCENE templates................ 27 Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 28 Playback ................................................................ 29 Basic operations....................................................... 29 Additional operations............................................... 30 Sound field programs ........................................... 34 Sound field program descriptions............................ 34 Automatic tuning ..................................................... 37 Manual tuning.......................................................... 37 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 38 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 38 Selecting preset stations........................................... 39 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 39 Using iPod™.......................................................... 40 Controls and functions for iPod™ ........................... 40 Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 41 Recording .............................................................. 42 1 En English Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth™ component .............................. 41 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 41 • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “A STANDBY/ON” or “3 DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). APPENDIX FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 37 About this manual Features Features Built-in 5-channel power amplifier Sophisticated FM/AM tuner ◆ Minimum RMS output power ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 100 W/ch Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W/ch [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) Front: 100 W/ch Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W/ch SCENE select function ◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations ◆ SCENE template customizing capability Decoders and DSP circuits ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of multi-channel surround sound ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode ◆ Dolby Digital decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder ◆ DTS decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) DOCK terminal ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). Other features ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ iPod controlling capability ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes iPod™ “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. 2 En Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. Getting started Getting started ■ Installing batteries in the remote control Check that you received all of the following parts. ❏ Remote control 1 ❏ Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) 3 ❏ AM loop antenna ❏ Indoor FM antenna ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) INTRODUCTION ■ Checking the supplied accessories 2 Caution The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Select the switch position (upper or lower) according to your local voltage using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are 110-120/220-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. VOLTAGE SELECTOR 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes 110V120V 220V240V • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following condition: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. • Do not use an old battery and a new one together. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control code. English 3 En Quick start guide Quick start guide The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Video monitor Front right speaker Prepare the following items. Subwoofer Front left speaker Preparation: Check the items Surround right speaker ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speaker ..................................... x 2 ❏ Center speaker ................................... x 1 ❏ Surround speaker .............................. x 2 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. Center speaker ❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1 Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. DVD player Surround left speaker ❏ Speaker cable ......................................... x 5 ❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1 Step 1: Set up your speakers ☞ P. 5 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor ......................................... x 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. ❏ Video cable ............................................. x 2 Select an RCA composite video cable. Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 6 Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button ☞ P. 7 Enjoy DVD playback! 4 En ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1 Quick start guide Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Step 1: Set up your speakers Front speakers Loosen DVD SURROUND R L DTV/CBL HDMI DVD Insert Tighten SPEAKERS ANTENNA OUT DOCK INTRODUCTION Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. CENTER FRONT B L R COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DVR DTV/CBL MONITOR OUT OUT IN FM 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL Y CD 3 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 SURROUND DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL DVR IN AUDIO OUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUTPUT SUB WOOFER L DVD 1 R R COAXIAL R FRONT A SUBWOOFER L 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. To the front right speaker To the front left speaker Center and surround speakers Press down Insert Release Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. To the center speaker 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal on this unit. 1 2 3 4 To the surround right speaker 4 To the surround left speaker Connect the subwoofer cable to the input jack on the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack on this unit. Subwoofer AV receiver 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack Input jack Subwoofer cable English 5 En Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components DVD SURROUND R L DTV/CBL HDMI DVD CENTER Connect the video cable to the video input jack on your video monitor and the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack on this unit. Video monitor SPEAKERS ANTENNA OUT DOCK 3 FRONT B L AV receiver R COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL DVD DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT OUT IN FM 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL Y CD 3 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 SURROUND CENTER DVR IN L L R R AUDIO OUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUTPUT SUB WOOFER DVD 1 COAXIAL R FRONT A SUBWOOFER L Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Video input jack Video cable 4 1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack on your DVD player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack on this unit. DVD player AV receiver VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack Connect the power plug of this unit and other components into the AC wall outlet. ■ For further connections • Using the other kind of speaker combinations ☞ P. 10 • Connecting a video monitor and DVD player ☞ P. 15 • Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner and ☞ P. 15 DVD recorder Digital coaxial audio output jack • Connecting to the HDMI jacks Digital coaxial audio cable 2 DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack on your DVD player and the DVD VIDEO jack on this unit. DVD player AV receiver ☞ P. 16 • Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO ☞ P. 16 jacks • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front ☞ P. 18 panel • Connecting a CD player and an MD ☞ P. 17 recorder • Connecting a DVD player via analog ☞ P. 17 multi-channel audio connection • Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 19 Composite video output jack 6 En Video cable DVD VIDEO jack • Connecting an iPod/Bluetooth dock ☞ P. 18 Quick start guide Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button 5 Rotate HVOLUME to adjust the volume. INTRODUCTION Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 12). 1 Turn on the video monitor and then set the input source selector of the video monitor to this unit. Note 2 Press ASTANDBY/ON on the front panel. When you change the input source or sound field program, the SCENE mode is deactivated and the indicator on the SCENE button turns off. ■ About SCENE function Just by pressing one SCENE button, you can turn on this unit and recall your favorite input source and sound field program according to the SCENE template that has been assigned to the SCENE button. The SCENE templates are built combinations of input sources and sound field programs. y 3 Press PSCENE 1. “DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display, and this unit automatically optimize own status for the DVD playback. y The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while this unit is in the SCENE mode. 4 ■ Using the other SCENE buttons Default SCENE button The name of the SCENE template and its description SCENE 1 DVD Viewing – input source: DVD – sound field program: STRAIGHT For when you want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player as the background music for this room. SCENE 2 Disc Listening – input source: DVD – sound field program: 5ch Stereo For when you want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player as the background music for this room. SCENE 3 TV Viewing *1 – input source: DTV/CBL – sound field program: STRAIGHT For when you want to watch a TV program. SCENE 4 Radio Listening *2, *3, *4 – input source: TUNER – sound field program: Music Enh. 5ch For when you want to listen to a music program from the FM radio station 7 En English Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. If you connect a Yamaha product that has capability of the SCENE control signals, this unit can automatically activate the component and start playback. Refer to the instruction manual of the DVD player for further information. Quick start guide Notes *1 You must connect a cable TV or a satellite tuner to this unit in advance. See page 16 for details. *2 You need to connect the supplied FM and AM antennas to this unit in advance. See page 19 for details. *3 You have to tune into the desired radio station. See pages 37 to 39 for the tuning information. *4 To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna. What do you want to do with this unit? ■ Customizing the SCENE templates • Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 24 ■ Using various input sources • Basic controls of this unit ☞ P. 29 • Enjoying FM/AM radio programs ☞ P. 37 ■ After using this unit... • Using your iPod with this unit ☞ P. 40 Press ASTANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. • Using the Bluetooth component ☞ P. 41 y If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See page 24 for details. ■ Using various sound features • Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 34 ■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit • Optimizing the speaker parameters for your listening room (BASIC SETUP) ☞ P. 22 • Manually adjusting various parameters of ☞ P. 43 this unit This unit is set to the standby mode. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press ASTANDBY/ON (or DPOWER) on the front panel. See page 19 for details. • Setting the remote control • Adjusting the advanced parameters ☞ P. 54 Note In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. ☞ P. 51 ■ Additional features • Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 33 8 En Connections Connections Rear panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 ANTENNA DVD SPEAKERS SURROUND R L DTV/CBL HDMI DOCK DVD CENTER FRONT B L PREPARATION OUT R COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT OUT IN FM 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL Y CD 3 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 SURROUND DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL DVR IN AUDIO CD OUT IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUTPUT SUB WOOFER L DVD 1 R R COAXIAL R FRONT A SUBWOOFER 7 8 9 L 0 Name See page 1 DOCK terminal 18 2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 16 3 HDMI jacks 16 4 VIDEO jacks 15 5 ANTENNA terminals 19 6 SPEAKERS terminals 11 7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 15, 17 8 MULTI CH INPUT jacks 9 AUDIO jacks 0 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack 17 15, 17 11 English 9 En Connections Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. FL C FR FR SW FL 30˚ C SL SR SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SL Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. 10 En Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Caution • • • • Surround speakers Right Left Front speakers (B) Right Left PREPARATION Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 12). Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this the AC power plug is disconnected from the AC wall outlet. Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. Center speaker SPEAKERS ANTENNA OUT DVD SURROUND R L DTV/CBL HDMI DOCK DVD CENTER FRONT B L R COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL DVR IN MONITOR OUT OUT FM 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL Y CD 3 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 SURROUND DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL DVR IN AUDIO CD OUT L IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUTPUT SUB WOOFER DVD 1 R R COAXIAL R FRONT A SUBWOOFER Subwoofer ■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS terminal A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. L Right Left Front speakers (A) Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the bare wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (3/8”) English 11 En Connections ■ Connecting to the FRONT A terminals 2 1 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Caution If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 3 1 Loosen the knob. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the slit on the terminal. 3 Setting the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 1 Make sure this unit is turned off. See page 19 for details about turning on or off this unit. 2 Press and hold JTONE CONTROL and then press ASTANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, an the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press KPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select “SP IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Connecting the banana plug (except Europe, Russia, Korea, and Asia models) The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug SP IMP.- 8 MIN 4 ■ Connecting to the FRONT B, CENTER, and SURROUND terminals Press LSTRAIGHT repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. SP IMP.- 6 MIN Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 5 1 Press down the tab. Press ASTANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the hole on the terminal. 3 Release the tab to secure the wire. 12 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Coaxial digital audio cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR VIDEO (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red) O V Y PB PR Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug PREPARATION Left and right analog audio cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Notes COMPONENT VIDEO • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. All digital input jacks are compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency. • This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Input Output (MONITOR OUT) PR PR PB PB Y Y VIDEO English 13 En Connections Information on HDMI™ Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output from any speaker terminals but output from the connected video monitor. To enjoy the sound from speakers connected to this unit, – make an analog or digital connection besides the HDMI connection (see page 16). – mute the volume of the connected video monitor. You can play back pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source component to this unit using HDMI connections. At that time, audio/video signals output from the connected component (such as DVD player etc.) are output to the connected video monitor only when this unit is turned on and set to the input source (DVD or DTV/CBL). Furthermore, available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component. ■ HDMI jack and cable plug HDMI HDMI cable plug y • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. 14 En Connections Connecting video components y You can also connect a video monitor, DVD player, digital TV, and cable TV to this unit using the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO connection (see page 16). OUT DVD ■ Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner and a DVD recorder DTV/CBL OUT HDMI DOCK DVD DVD PREPARATION ■ Connecting a video monitor and a DVD player Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. DTV/CBL HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT DOCK DVD PR COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT PR VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL DVR PB MONITOR OUT OUT IN VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL DVD DVR DTV/CBL MONITOR OUT OUT IN OPTICAL Y Y CD 3 CD 3 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 SURROUND DVD CENTER DTV/CBL DVR IN L AUDIO MULTI CH INPUT CD OUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 L SURROUND DVD 1 DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL AUDIO DVR IN CD OUT L DVD 1 R R R COAXIAL R COAXIAL SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER L V R V O L V R L V R L R V Video in Audio in Audio out Video out Audio out Video out Audio out Video in Audio out Video out C Audio out DVD player * Video monitor* Cable TV or Satellite tuner DVD recorder indicates recommended connections indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections indicates alternative connections When you use the internal tuner of the TV as the input source, connect the digital or analog audio output jacks of the TV and digital or analog audio input jacks of this unit. English 15 En Connections ■ Connecting to the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks You can enjoy high-quality pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source components to this unit using HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO connections. Note Be sure to connect your video components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using an HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO connection, connect your video components to this unit using the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO connection. HDMI connection Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output from any speaker terminals but output from the connected video monitor. To enjoy the sound from speakers connected to this unit, – make an analog or digital connection besides the HDMI connection (see page 15). – mute the volume of the connected video monitor. Video monitor DVD player PR Video in PB Video out Y Video monitor Y PB PR Cable TV or satellite tuner OUT DVD DTV/CBL HD DOCK COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT DVD PR VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DVR DTV/CBL IN MON O OUT OPTICAL Y CD 3 ANTENNA OUT DVD MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 DTV/CBL DVD CENTER L HDMI OMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT SURROUND DTV/CBL DVR IN AUDIO OUT L DVD 1 AM R R COAXIAL GND SUBWOOFER VIDEO DVD DVR DTV/CBL IN OUT MONITOR OUT FM 75 UNBAL. MULTI CH INPUT AUDIO Y PB PR Y PB PR Video out Video out Cable TV or satellite tuner DVD recorder DVD player Notes • Connect the input source components to the HDMI DVD or HDMI DTV/CBL jack to display the video images on the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. • Audio/video signals output from the connected component (such as DVD player etc.) are output to the connected video monitor only when this unit is turned on and set to the input source (DVD or DTV/CBL). • Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of each connected component. 16 En C Connections Connecting audio components ■ Connecting a CD player and a CD recorder/MD recorder Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Note When you connect your CD player via analog and digital connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL INPUT jack. GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT OUT IN FM PREPARATION 75 UNBAL. OPTICAL Y CD 3 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 SURROUND DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL DVR IN AUDIO CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) OUT OUTPUT SUB WOOFER L DVD 1 R R COAXIAL SUBWOOFER O L R Audio out L Audio out Audio out CD player R L R Audio in CD recorder or MD recorder indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. CD 3 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 SURROUND DVD CENTER DTV/CBL DVR IN L L R R • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 30), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. DVD 1 COAXIAL SUBWOOFER R English Center out Subwoofer out L Surround out R Front out L Notes Multi-format player or external decoder 17 En Connections Connecting a Yamaha iPod™ universal dock and Bluetooth™ adapter Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Caution Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Notes This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) or Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. • The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. • To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. • The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks. y VOLUME Refer to “Using iPod™” on page 40 for playback of your iPod and “Using Bluetooth™ components” on page 41 for playback of your Bluetooth components. STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING BAND A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT PROGRAM PHONES DTV/CBL DVR VIDEO AUX AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO R EFFECT VIDEO AUX COMPONENT VID DVD TUNING AUTO/MAN'L 4 INPUT TONE CONTROL SPEAKERS A/B/OFF SILENT CINEMA DOCK MEMORY SCENE 1 VIDEO L V L AUDIO R PORTABLE PR DIGITAL INPUT PB OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 DVD 1 3.5 mm stereo mini plug Y MULTI CH INPU FRONT R SURROU L 18 En Audio out Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth adapter R Video out COAXIAL Game console or video camera PORTABLE Connections Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Notes Outdoor AM antenna AM loop antenna (supplied) Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft) of vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. Note The types of the supplied AM loop antenna is different depending on the models. Connecting the power cable Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Power cable ANTENNA Indoor FM antenna (supplied) DEO N DVR OUT PREPARATION • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. MONITOR OUT AM GND (U.S.A. model) FM R SURRO 75 UNBAL. AUDIO N DVR OUT OUTP CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) S To the AC wall outlet Ground For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Turning on and off the power ■ Turning on this unit Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna Open the lever Insert Close the lever Press ASTANDBY/ON (or D POWER) to turn on this unit. y When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. ■ Set this unit to the standby mode y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal. Press ASTANDBY/ON (or E STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. Note 19 En English In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. Connections Front panel display 1 2 3 4 DVR t 5 V-AUX 7 6 DTV/CBL MD/CD-R DVD DOCK VIRTUAL ENHANCER TUNER 8 CD AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY PRESET SLEEP MUTE SP SILENT CINEMA NIGHT AB q DIGITAL q PL ft q PL mS dB PCM 0 A B C 1 Decoder indicator Lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions. 2 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 34). D E 9 VOLUME dB LFE L C R SL SR F G 0 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. A Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 30). 3 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 36). B SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected (see page 29). 4 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 36). C NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 31). 5 DOCK indicator • Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 18) when V-AUX is selected as the input source. • Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adaptor (such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth component is in the paring (see page 18) or the Bluetooth adaptor is searching the Bluetooth component (see page 41). • Light up while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adaptor is connected to the Bluetooth component (see page 18). D CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a sound field program (see page 34). 6 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 7 Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode (see page 37). 8 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 30). 9 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. 20 En E Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. F SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 33). G Input channel and speaker indicators LFE L C R SL SR LFE indicator Input channel indicators LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. Connections ■ Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 30º 30º PREPARATION Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. y To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 53. Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 53. English 21 En Basic setup Basic setup The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. Notes • Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit. • If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see page 45). • Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 45). • Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. • Press 8RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level. 1 Press 4AMP on the remote control. 2 Press HMENU. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. 5 SUBWOOFER .. YES . BASIC SETUP 3 Choices: YES, NONE • Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your system. • Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in your system. Press 7ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”. “ROOM” appears in the front panel display. 6 ROOM: 4 S >M L Press 7l / h to select the desired setting. Select the size of the room where you have installed your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined as follows: Press 7n to select “SUBWOOFER” and then 7l / h to select the desired setting. Press 7n to select “SPEAKERS” and then 7l / h to select the number of speakers connected to this unit. SPEAKERS..5spk Choice Display Speakers Choices: S, M, L [U.S.A. and Canada models] S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft2 (4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2) M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft2 (6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2) L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft2 (7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m2) [Other models] S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2 2spk L R 3spk L C R 4spk L SL R SR 5spk 22 En L C R SL SR Front L/R Front L/R, Center Front L/R, Surround L/R Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R Basic setup 7 Press 7n to select “SET” and then 7l / h to select the desired setting. SET Press 7ENTER to confirm your selection. • If you selected “YES” in step 9, the setup procedure is completed and the display returns to the top set menu display. Press HMENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”. • If you selected “NO” in step 9, the front speaker level adjustment display appears in the front panel display. 11 Press 7k / n to select a speaker and then 7l / h to adjust the balance. The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn. • Press 7h to increase the value. • Press 7l to decrease the value. >CANCEL Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to apply the settings you made. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure without making any changes. y You can also press HMENU to cancel the setup procedure. 8 Press 7ENTER to confirm your selection. If you selected “SET” in step 7, each speaker outputs a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears in the front panel display for a few seconds and then “CHECK OK?” appears in the front panel display. FR ----||---- CHECK:TestTone • Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front left and right speakers. • Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front left and center speakers. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front left and surround left speakers. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround right speakers. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the front left speaker and the subwoofer. y • Check the speaker connections (see page 5) and adjust the “SPEAKERS” settings back in step 6, if necessary. • The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes in the front panel display. 9 Press 7l / h to select the desired setting. CHECK OK? .. YES Choices: YES, NO • Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if the test tone levels from each speaker were satisfactory. • Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level adjustment menu to balance the output level of each speaker. PREPARATION 10 Note The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. 12 Press HMENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”. English 23 En SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES Selecting the SCENE templates This unit is equipped with 13 preset SCENE templates for various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to each SCENE button: 2 Press NINPUT l / h (or press 4AMP and then 7l / h) to select the desired template. l SCENE 1: DVD Viewing SCENE 2: Disc Listening SCENE 3: TV Viewing SCENE 4: Radio Listening INPUT h Front panel or If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE buttons on the front panel and the remote control. AMP ENTER Select the desired SCENE template Remote control 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button SCENE template library (Image) DVD Movie View 3 Selecting the desired SCENE template 1 Press and hold the desired PSCENE (or 5SCENE) button for 3 seconds. The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the front panel starts to flash, and the name of currently assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel display. 3 seconds 3 seconds 1 or 1 Front panel Remote control 1 Flashes DVD Viewing 24 En Press the PSCENE (or 5SCENE) button again to confirm the selection. The selected SCENE template is assigned to the button. 1 Front panel or 1 Remote control y To cancel the procedure, press 4AMP and then 8RETURN. Note Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 28 for details. Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Which SCENE template would you like to select? Which source do you like to play back? Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video) Which component do you like for playback? DVD SCENE templates DVD Viewing Default SCENE buttons 1 DVD Movie Viewing DVD Live Viewing Music discs (CD, SA-CD or DVD-Audio) DVR DVR Viewing DVD Music Disc Listening Disc Listening BASIC OPERATION CD 2 CD Listening CD Music Listening Radio programs TUNER (FM/AM) Radio Listening iPod or Bluetooth component DOCK Dock Listening TV programs DTV/CBL TV Viewing 4 3 TV Sports Viewing Video games V-AUX Game Playing Note When iPod is connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock or a Bluetooth component is connected to the Bluetooth adapter, this unit plays back the audio sources input at the DOCK terminal. y You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 27 for details. English 25 En Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Preset SCENE template descriptions SCENE template Features Input source Playback mode CD Music Listening Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your CD player. CD 2ch Stereo DVD Viewing (SCENE 1 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents on your DVD player. DVD STRAIGHT DVD Movie Viewing Radio Listening (SCENE 4 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio programs. TUNER Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your DVD player. DVD Movie Dramatic DVD Live Viewing Select this SCENE template when you enjoy music live video on your DVD player. DVD Pop/Rock Dock Listening Select this SCENE template when you play back music on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth component that is connected to the Bluetooth adapter. DOCK TV Viewing (SCENE 3 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you enjoy TV programs. Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your digital video recorder. Movie Dramatic Music Disc Listening 2ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on TV. DTV/CBL Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources as the back ground music on your DVD player. DVD 5ch Stereo CD Listening Select this SCENE template when you play back music source as the back ground music on your CD player. CD 26 En 5ch Stereo TV Sports Game Playing Select this SCENE template when you play video games. V-AUX Disc Listening (SCENE 2 as the default setting) STRAIGHT TV Sports Viewing Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your DVD player. DVD Music Enh. 5ch DTV/CBL DVR Viewing DVR Music Enh. 5ch Game Selecting the SCENE templates Creating your original SCENE templates 2 You can create your original SCENE templates for each SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 13 SCENE templates to create the original SCENE templates. ■ Customizing the preset SCENE templates • The input source component • The active sound field programs or STRAIGHT mode • The night listening mode setting (see page 31) − SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening mode. − CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the CINEMA mode. − MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the MUSIC mode. Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates. Select the desired SCENE template Create an original SCENE template SCENE : DVD Viewing SCENE : DVD Viewing INPUT : DVD 3 Press the 5SCENE button again to confirm the edit. 1 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button 1 Press and hold the desired 5SCENE button for 3 seconds and then press 4AMP. The SCENE template customizing display appears on the front panel display. 1 AMP 3 seconds Note BASIC OPERATION SCENE template library (Image) Press 7k / n to select the desired parameter of the SCENE template and then 7l / h to select the desired value of the selected parameter. You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE template: y • An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE template. • To cancel the procedure, press 4AMP and then 8RETURN. Notes • After changing the assignment of the SCENE template to the 5SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 28 for details. • You can create a customized SCENE template for each 5SCENE button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one. • The customized SCENE template is only available for the assigned 5SCENE button. When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned to any of the 5SCENE button, press 7l / h repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template (see page 24). English 27 En Selecting the SCENE templates Using remote control on the SCENE feature ■ Controlling the input source components in the SCENE mode ■ Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control You can operate both this unit and the input source component by using the remote control. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 53). If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE template, you must set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control to operate the input source component correctly. 1 Press the desired 5SCENE button on the remote control. Press and hold the 5SCENE button and the desired input selector button (3) for 3 seconds. 2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below to control the input source component of the selected SCENE template. y * POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B C MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 TV CH TV VOL SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 MENU 4 SCENE buttons VOLUME ENTER RETURN DISPLAY REC l PROG h 1 2 STRAIGHT 5 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 4 NIGHT 6 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT Note * These buttons control the input source component. See page 51 for details of the function of each button. 28 En Press the 5SCENE button again to operate the input source component. PLAYBACK Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. Basic operations 1 5 Rotate HVOLUME (or press IVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. 6 Press KPROGRAM l / h (or press 4AMP and then press 0PROG l / h) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. See page 34 for details about sound field programs. Movie Dramatic Currently selected surround field program 2 3 Press ISPEAKERS repeatedly to select the front speakers you want to use. The respective speaker indicators lights up in the front panel display. Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (3)) to select the desired input source. The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display for a few seconds. Available input source DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD INPUT:DVD Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 30). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 36). • To display information about the currently selected input source in the front panel display, see page 32 for details. ■ Guide to contents Currently selected input source When you want to... 4 Start playback on the selected component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 37 for details about FM or AM tuning instructions. BASIC OPERATION Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. See page Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 31 Edit parameters of sound field programs 35 Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at night 31 Use headphones 30 Select a decoder to play back sources with 35 Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 33 English 29 En Playback ■ Selecting the front speaker set Additional operations ■ Using your headphones Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. Press ISPEAKERS repeatedly to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A or FRONT B speaker terminals. The active front speaker set changes as follows: FRONT A FRONT B OFF VOLUME STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING l A/B/C/D/E BAND PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SILENT CINEMA SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT h Note 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT Turn off the volume level of this unit when you switch the front speaker setting. ■ Using the Zone B feature When you set “FRONT B” to “ZONE B” (see page 45), you can use the speakers connected to the FRONT B speaker terminals in another room (Zone B). y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode is automatically activated (see page 36). Press ISPEAKERS on the front panel repeatedly to turn on or off the Zone B speakers. When you activate the Zone B speakers, all the speakers in the main room are muted. Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. ■ Muting the audio output Press FMUTE to mute the audio output. Press FMUTE again to resume the audio output. y • You can also rotate HVOLUME (or press IVOLUME +/–) to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using “MUTE TYP.” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 48). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. Notes • You cannot activate both the main room and Zone B speakers simultaneously. • If you select CINEMA DSP sound field program and activate the Zone B speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically (see page 36). ■ Selecting the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 17) as the input source. Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 4AMP and then press BMULTI CH IN) so that “MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display. y Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameter for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 49). Notes • The input signals are amplified and output directly without sound processing. Therefore, you cannot activate sound field programs, the night listening mode, etc. while MULTI CH is selected as the input source. • When headphones are used, signals are output only from the front left and right channels. 30 En Playback ■ Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) 2 This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source. y • We recommend setting audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 50). Press OAUDIO SELECT (or press 4AMP and then CAUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack select setting. DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD A.SEL:AUTO AUTO ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Note This feature is not available when no digital input jack are assigned to the currently selected input source. ■ Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. 1 Press 4AMP and then press MNIGHT repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, NIGHT OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “NIGHT OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher than 96 kHz. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. ■ Adjusting the tonal quality Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front left and right speaker channels. BASIC OPERATION Audio input jack select setting Press 7l / h to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. Press JTONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “BASS” or “TREBLE” and then press KPROGRAM l / h to adjust the corresponding frequency response level. Control range: –10 to +10 dB Control step: 2 • Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response. • Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency response. Notes • Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. English 31 En Playback ■ Adjusting speaker levels during playback You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. ■ Displaying the signal information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Note This operation will override the level adjustment made in “SP LEVEL” (see page 46). 1 Press 4AMP and then press 6LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. Display Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SWFR Subwoofer SUR.L Surround left speaker SUR.R Surround right speaker ;BASIC SETUP 2 Press 7k / n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press 7ENTER. 3 Press 7k / n to switch the displayed information. The following information about the input source appears in the front panel display. Display y Once you press 6LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing 7k / n. 2 Press 4AMP and then press HMENU on the remote control. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. Press 7l / h on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from –10 dB to +10 dB. Description Format Signal format. Sampling frequency The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). Bit rate The number of bits passing a given point per second. Flag data Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. y You can press DA/B/C/D/E to select a speaker and then EPRESET/TUNING l / h to adjust the speaker output level. 32 En 4 Press HMENU to exit. Playback ■ Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. Press 4AMP and then press OSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press OSLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP 90min ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons (3) on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. SLEEP 60min CD The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. MD/CD-R TUNER Audio sources DVD DTV/CBL DVR Video sources V-AUX/DOCK y DVD DTV/CBL BASIC OPERATION • To cancel the sleep timer, press OSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. • You can also cancel the sleep timer setting by pressing ASTANDBY/ON (or ESTANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. DVR Video sources V-AUX/DOCK MULTI CH IN 9 Audio sources English 33 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. Press KPROGRAM l / h (or press 4AMP and then press 0PROG l / h repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 30). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 36). • When the sampling frequency of the input sources are higher than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs. y • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. • You can select “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music Enh. 5ch” by pressing KENHANCER repeatedly. Sound field program descriptions Category MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO ENHANCER Program Features Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments. Hall CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful reverberation and a majestic atmosphere. Jazz CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music. It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation. Game CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games. The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies. TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium. Movie Spacious CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds. Movie Dramatic CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on three-dimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center orientation of voices as pivots. 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 5ch Stereo CINEMA DSP processing. Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Music Enh. 2ch Music Enh. 5ch Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or 5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. Note The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. 34 En Sound field programs ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) y Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports, Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic: Press 4AMP and then press LSUR. DECODE repeatedly to select a decoder. You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. STANDARD Functions Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. DSP level Function: Choices: For PRO LOGIC II Music: Panorama Function: Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources Choices: PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources Dimension Function: PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory default parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 1 While listening to a source, press 4AMP and then press 7k / n to select the desired parameter. 2 Press 7l / h to change the parameter value. Note PANORAMA Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. OFF, ON DIMENSION Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). Center width CT WIDTH Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. BASIC OPERATION PRO LOGIC ■ Editing sound fields parameters DSP LEVEL Adjusts the effect level. MIN, MID, MAX For Music Enh. 2ch and Music Enh. 5ch Effect level Function: Choices: EFCL LVL Adjusts the effect level. LOW, HIGH You cannot change parameter values when “MEM.GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 50). English 35 En Sound field programs ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers by creating virtual speakers. If you set “SUR. LR” to “NONE” (see page 47), Virtual CINEMA DSP is automatically activated whenever you select a sound field program (see page 34). When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not be activated even when “SUR. LR” is set to “NONE” (see page 45) in the following cases: – when “5ch Stereo” (see page 34) is selected. – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA is automatically activated whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to sound field programs (except for 2ch Stereo and Music Enh. 2ch) (see page 34). When SILENT CINEMA is activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. 36 En Press LSTRAIGHT (or press 4AMP and then ASTRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press LSTRAIGHT (or ASTRAIGHT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. FM/AM TUNING FM/AM tuning There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations. Automatic tuning Manual tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. 1 Note Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. Press CBAND to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press GTUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. Lights up 1 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. 2 Press CBAND to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press GTUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. AUTO A AM 1440 kHz BASIC OPERATION 2 Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. No colon (:) A If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, automatic tuning is not possible. Press BPRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press EPRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. Lights up AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, manual tuning is not possible. Press BPRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press EPRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. You can hold down the button to continue searching. AUTO TUNED A AM 1530 kHz English 37 En FM/AM tuning Automatic preset tuning Manual preset tuning You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. 1 2 3 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. Press CBAND to select “FM” as the reception band. You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. 1 Tune into a station automatically or manually. See page 37 for tuning instructions. 2 Press FMEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 30 seconds. 3 Press DA/B/C/D/E and EPRESET/TUNING l / h repeatedly to select a preset station group and number (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Press and hold FMEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. Flashes TUNED Flashes C3 : AM AUTO 630 kHz MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y Preset station group and number 4 Press FMEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. You can select the preset station group and the preset station number where the first received station will be stored by pressing DA/B/C/D/E and then EPRESET/TUNING l / h. TUNED C3 : AM Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page. 38 En MEMORY 630 kHz The displayed station has been stored as C3. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. FM/AM tuning Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. y When performing this operation with the remote control, press 3TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 2 Press DA/B/C/D/E (or 7A/B/C/D/E l / h) repeatedly to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 1 Select preset station “E1” using DA/B/C/D/E and EPRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. 2 Press and hold BPRESET/TUNING for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY E1 : FM 87.5 MHz Flashes 3 E1 : FM 87.5 MHz y You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly by pressing the numeric buttons (N). Select preset station “A5” using DA/B/C/D/E and EPRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. BASIC OPERATION Press EPRESET/TUNING l / h (or 7PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. Exchanging preset stations Flashes MEMORY A5 : FM 90.5 MHz Flashes 4 Press BPRESET/TUNING again. “EXCHANGE E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. English 39 En USING IPOD™ Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 18), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Supported iPod iPod (Click and Wheel) iPod nano iPod mini Battery charge feature Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. Stationing your iPod to the Yamaha iPod universal dock Once you station your iPod to the Yamaha iPod universal dock, “iPod connected” and the DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. Controls and functions for iPod™ V-AUX/DOCK POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MUTE A B C CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE V-AUX/DOCK Select “V-AUX” or “DOCK” as the input source. TV CH BAND LEVEL TITLE MENU TV VOL SCENE 1 2 BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 MENU 4 VOLUME ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY REC RETURN l PROG h 1 2 STRAIGHT 5 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 4 NIGHT 6 0 DISPLAY MENU/Cursor buttons (k/n/l/h)/ENTER Navigate the menu of your iPod. • Press HMENU or 7l to move to the previous menu level. • Press 7k/n to move to the upper/lower menu level. • Press 7ENTER or 7h to move to the subsequent menu, start playback of the selected menu level, or change the selected setting. 10 8 SLEEP ENT REC Playback control buttons Control the playback of the connected iPod. p/e: Play/pause s: Stop w/f: Search backward/forward b/a: Skip backward/forward Notes • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. Refer to the instruction manuals of your iPod for the operations on your iPod. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 58. 40 En USING BLUETOOTH™ COMPONENTS Using Bluetooth™ components You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth adapter and your Bluetooth component in advance. Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth™ component Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter connected to this unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications. Note If the Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, “No BT adapter” appears in the front panel display. Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth adapter. If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list. 5 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass key “0000” to the Bluetooth component. When the pairing procedure is successful, “Completed” appears in the front panel display. y • You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth adapter. • Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s operating instructions. There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing. ■ Pairing by using “SET MENU” Use this feature to perform pairing with the video monitor. Select “START PAIRING” in “INPUT MENU”. See page 50 for details. BASIC OPERATION 4 Note The Yamaha Bluetooth adapter can be paired with up to eight other components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared. ■ Quick pairing To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. 1 Press 4AMP and then press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 3V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the input source. 2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with. 3 Press and hold CBAND (or 6BAND) for 3 seconds. Once the Bluetooth adapter starts pairing, “Searching...” appears for a moment. While the Bluetooth adapter is in the pairing mode, DOCK indicator flashes in the front panel display. 1 Press 4AMP and then press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press 3V-AUX/DOCK) to select “V-AUX” as the input source. 2 Start playback of your Bluetooth component. When the connected Bluetooth adapter detects the Bluetooth component, “BT connected” and the DOCK indicator appears in the front panel display. y • When you press 7ENTER on the remote control, the connected Bluetooth adapter searches and connect to the last connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth adapter cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in the front panel display. • To disconnect the Bluetooth adapter from the Bluetooth component, press 8RETURN. 41 En English y To cancel the pairing, press CBAND (or 6BAND) again. Playback of the Bluetooth™ component RECORDING Recording Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Notes • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 31) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 32) and the sound field programs (see page 34) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot be recorded. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source. • A given input source is not output on the same AUDIO OUT (REC) channel. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Press NINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (3)) to select the source component you want to record from. 42 En 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. Set menu Set menu You can use the following parameters in set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 22). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. 45 B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 46 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the distance of each speaker. 47 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 47 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 47 F)D.RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 47 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay settings, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 48 ADVANCED OPERATION Features Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)INPUT ASSIGN Assigns the input jacks on this unit according to the component to be used. 48 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 49 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 49 D)DECODER MODE Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 49 E)MULTI CH SET Select the video source played in the background of the sources in put from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 49 English 43 En Set menu Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display. 50 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other set menu settings. 50 C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. 50 D)PARAM. INI Sets all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. 50 E)BLUETOOTH Pairs the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with a Bluetooth component (see page 41). 50 ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 32). Using set menu 4 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. y You can change the set menu parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. 1 1 SOUND MENU Press 4AMP and then press HMENU on the remote control. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. 2 INPUT MENU . BASIC SETUP 2 Press 7 k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”. 3 OPTION MENU 5 Press 7k / n repeatedly and then press 7ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. • Repeat this step to navigate to and enter the items you want to adjust. • To return to the previous menu level, press 8RETURN. 6 Press 7k / n to select the desired parameter and then 7l / h to change the parameter value. • Press 7h to increase the value. • Press 7l to decrease the value. 7 Press HMENU to exit from set menu. . MANUAL SETUP 3 Press 7ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. “1 SOUND MENU” appears in the front panel display. 1 SOUND MENU 44 En Press 7k / n repeatedly and then press 7ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following menus appear in the front panel display as you press 7k / n repeatedly. Set menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on and off when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If FRONT A is turned off and FRONT B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B terminals only. Notes Front speakers FRONT Choices: LARGE, SMALL When the front speakers are large Select “LARGE” (large). When the front speakers are small Select “SMALL” (small). Note When “BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 46), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT”. If the value of “FRONT” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”. Center speaker CENTER Choices: NONE, SML, LRG When the center speaker is large Select “LRG” (large). When the center speaker is small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the center speaker Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. Surround left/right speakers SUR. LR Choices: NONE, SML, LRG ADVANCED OPERATION • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 36). Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small When the surround speakers are large Select “LRG” (large). When the surround speakers are small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the surround speakers Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 36). English 45 En Set menu LFE/Bass out BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get natural bass sound Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get rich bass sound Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT” setting (see page 45). When you do not use a subwoofer Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT” setting (see page 45). Crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 44 and 45). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 44 and 45). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NRM, REV • Select “NRM” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REV” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. 46 En ■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Control range: –10 to +10 dB Control step: 1 dB Initial setting: 0 dB SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker FL Front left speaker FR Front right speaker C Center speaker SL Surround left speaker SR Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer Note The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Set menu ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft) SUR. L/SUR. R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer Following is an example where “100Hz” is selected as the frequency band. 100Hz--||-- 0 Test tone TEST Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and front left speakers. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input signal contains the LFE channel. ADVANCED OPERATION FRONT L y Press 7k / n to select a frequency band and 7l / h to adjust the selected frequency band. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB Speaker LFE SP LFE Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone LFE HP LFE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Note Depending on the settings of “BASS OUT” (see page 46), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. ■ Dynamic range ■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB F)D.RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. Speaker dynamic range SP D.R Adjusts the speaker compression. English Headphone dynamic range HP D.R Adjusts the headphone compression. 47 En Set menu ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. Mute type MUTE TYP. Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 30). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay A.DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is +16 dB to –80 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5 dB, the volume range becomes –5 dB to –80 dB. Control range: +16 dB, +10 dB to –30 dB Control step: 5 dB Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume” setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Initial volume INI.VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16 dB Control step: 1 dB Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI.VOL.” setting. 48 En 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. ■ Input assignment A)INPUT ASSIGN Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using NINPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons (3) on the remote control). For DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jacks 1 IN (1) Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR For DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL jacks 2 and 3 IN (2) IN (3) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once. • You cannot assign the same input source to both “IN (2)” and “IN (3)”. For example, you assign “CD” to “IN (2)”, “–––” appears in “IN (3)”. Set menu ■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME ■ Volume trim Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the front panel display. The following is an example where “DVD” is renamed “My DVD”. DVR DVD 1 V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD My DVD Press one of the input selector buttons (3) or BMULTI CH IN to select the input source you want to change the name of. CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Press one of the input selector buttons (3) or BMULTI CH IN to select the input source you want to adjust the level. Choices: CD, TUNER, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX (DOCK), DVR, MULTI CH IN Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB ■ Decoder mode or MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK Press 4AMP and then press 7l / h on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. 3 Press 7k / n to select the character you want to use and then press 7l / h to move to the next space. Notes • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press 7n to change the character in the following order, or press 7k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press HMENU to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. Decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used the connected input source. DTS decoder prioritize setting Choices: AUTO, DTS • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 D)DECODER MODE ■ Multi channel input setup E)MULTI CH SET BGV BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: LAST, DVR, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, DVD y Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. English 49 En Set menu ■ Bluetooth setting 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press 7l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press 7h to make the front panel display brighter. E)BLUETOOTH Start pairing START PAIRING Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) with your Bluetooth component. For details about the pairing, refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™ adapter and your Bluetooth™ component” on page 41. To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. 1 Memory guard MEM.GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEM.GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – sound field program parameters – all set menu items – all speaker levels – SCENE template parameters Select “START PAIRING” in “BLUETOOTH” and then press 7ENTER to start pairing. The connected Bluetooth adapter starts searching Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the front panel display. 2 Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth adapter. If the Bluetooth component the Bluetooth adapter, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list. Note 3 Select the Bluetooth adapter in the Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass key “0000” on the Bluetooth component. Once this unit completes the pairing successfully, “Completed” appears. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD When “MEM.GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other set menu items. ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected input source (see page 31). ■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. Choices: NO, YES • Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and return to the previous menu level. • Select “YES” to set all the sound field parameters to the initial factory settings. Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. 50 En y To cancel the pairing, press 8RETURN to exit from “START PAIRING”. 4 Press 8RETURN to exit from “START PAIRING”. Notes • If the connected Bluetooth adapter cannot find any Bluetooth components, “Not found” appears. • If a Bluetooth adapter is not connected to this unit, “No BT adapter” appears. Remote control features Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 53). - Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Press 4AMP to control this unit. Press 3DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your TV, set the appropriate remote control code for 3DTV/CBL (see page 53). POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B C MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DTV/CBL DVD DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE *1 DTV/CBL TV VOL AMP SCENE 1 2 BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 MENU POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B C MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER TV CH DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 TV CH *1 TV VOL 4 SCENE VOLUME BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 MENU 4 VOLUME ENTER ENTER RETURN *2 DISPLAY REC RETURN DISPLAY REC PROG h 1 2 5 3 4 NIGHT 6 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 *2 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE ADVANCED OPERATION l STRAIGHT 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT *2 l PROG h 1 2 STRAIGHT 5 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 4 NIGHT 6 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit. *2 These buttons control this unit only when 4AMP is pressed. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether you press 3DTV/CBL or not. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV INPUT Changes the input source. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. These buttons control your TV only when 3DTV/CBL is pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on page 52. y 51 En English You can control more than one TV by setting the appropriate remote control code for any input source selector buttons other than 3DTV/CBL. In such a case, you can control the buttons highlighted above (*1 and *2) when you press the input source selector button. Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Press one of the input selector buttons (3 ) or A to E buttons to control other components. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 53). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. [1] [2] POWER POWER TV AV A STANDBY POWER B C MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH BAND LEVEL TITLE [3] [4] MENU VOLUME [7] ENTER RETURN [8] DISPLAY REC y • The remote control has 13 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 13 different components. • When you press one of the optional component control area buttons (A to E), you can control the desired component without changing the input source of this unit. V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 [5] TV VOL SCENE 3 4 [6] l PROG h 1 2 STRAIGHT 5 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 7 MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 9 4 NIGHT 6 0 10 8 SLEEP ENT [9] DVD player/recor VCR der Digital TV/ Cable TV LD player CD player MD/CD recorder [1] AV POWER Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 [2] TITLE Title [3] PRESET/CH k Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) PRESET/CH n Down VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) A/B/C/D/E l Left Left Preset down (A-E) A/B/C/D/E h Right Right Preset up (A-E) ENTER Remote control Power *1 Band Enter Enter [4] RETURN Return Return [5] REC Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec Rec *2 p Play Play Play *2 w Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 f Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Play Disc skip Rec Play Play b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop [6] 1-9, 0, +10 Tuner Stop Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons [7] MENU Menu [8] DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display [9] ENT Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index Preset stations (1-8) Menu Notes *1 *2 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 53). 52 En Remote control features Setting remote control codes 2 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (N) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component to be used. When the setting succeeds, “RemoteSetup OK” appears; however, when it dues not, “RemoteSetup NG” appears in the front panel display. Remote control code default settings Notes Input source Component category Manufacturer Default code CD CD Yamaha 5013 MD/CD-R CD-R Yamaha 5001 TUNER TUNER Yamaha 5007 ■ Resetting all remote control codes DVD DVD Yamaha 2000 DTV/CBL — — — Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory settings. V-AUX/D OCK TUNER Yamaha 5011 DVR DVR Yamaha 2011 A TUNER Yamaha 5012 B TUNER Yamaha 5009 C TUNER Yamaha 5017 D — — — E — — — • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. 1 While pressing and holding 4AMP, press 2AV POWER for more than 3 seconds. AMP You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code. 1 While pressing and holding one of the input selector buttons (3) on the remote control to select the input area you want to set up, press 2AV POWER for more than 3 seconds. A B C CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AV While holding down 2 Press for 3 seconds Press the numeric buttons (N) to enter the code number “9981”. “RemoteSetup OK” appears in the front panel display, and the remote control codes previously set are cleared and reset to the initial factory settings. ADVANCED OPERATION Note POWER y If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 1, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing procedure. POWER AV Press for 3 seconds While holding down English 53 En Advanced setup Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • Only A STANDBY/ON, K PROGRAM l / h and L STRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN • Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level Front (A or B) 8ΩMIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround Front (A or B) 1 Press ASTANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold JTONE CONTROL and then press ASTANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press KPROGRAM l / h to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. 4 Press LSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. 5 Press ASTANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. 54 En 6ΩMIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround ■ Tuner frequency step TU (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. ■ Initializing PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the set menu parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 12 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 11 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13-17 No appropriate Audio input jack select has been set. Set an appropriate Audio input jack select. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with NINPUT l / h on the front panel (or the input selector buttons (3) on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with ISPEAKERS. 29 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press FMUTE or IVOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 30 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — Audio signals input at the HDMI jack are not output from any speaker terminals. Make an analog or digital connection beside the HDMI connection. — The setting of the connected component is improper. Make an appropriate setting following the instruction manual of the connected component. — The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the impedance setting is correct. 12 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press FMUTE or IVOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 30 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13-17 Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. 31 29, 30 32 55 En English Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Remedy ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG”. 45 Some sound field programs do not output sounds from the center speaker. Try another sound field program. 34 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. “SUR. LR” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. LR” to “SML” or “LRG”. 45 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press LSTRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 36 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. “BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 46 “BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel source is being played. Set “BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 46 The source does not contain low-frequency bass signals. Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 31 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. You are attempting to set the volume level higher than the maximum volume level. Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting. 48 The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks on this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEM.GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEM.GUARD” to “OFF”. 50 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 11 56 En 15, 17 Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature is too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. See page Move this unit further away from such equipment. — Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 19 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 37 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 37 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. 38 The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 37 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AM Cause English 57 En Troubleshooting ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel display, check the connection to your iPod (see page 18). Status message Connect error Cause There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Remedy See page Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 18 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 18 ■ Bluetooth Status message Searching... Cause Remedy See page The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth component is in the middle of the pairing. The Bluetooth adapter and the Bluetooth component is in the middle of establishing the connection. Completed The paring is completed. Canceled The paring is canceled. BT connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth component is established. Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately). No BT adapter The Bluetooth adapter is not connected to the DOCK terminal. 58 En Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal. 18 Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 21 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 53 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 53 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ■ Resetting the system Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. 1 Press ASTANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the set menu parameters. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y Press and hold JTONE CONTROL and then press ASTANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. The advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press KPROGRAM l / h to select “PRESET”. 4 Press LSTRAIGHT repeatedly to select “RESET”. Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 5 Press ASTANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press LSTRAIGHT repeatedly to select “CANCEL” and then press ASTANDBY/ON. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 English 59 En Glossary Glossary ■ Audio information Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. 60 En DTS Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. Glossary ■ Sound field program information ■ Video information CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field program so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 61 En Specifications Specifications AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω ............................................... 100 W/ch [Other models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ............................................... 100 W/ch • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Maximum Power (JEITA) [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ................................................ 135 W/ch [Asia, China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω .................................................135 W/ch • Video Maximum Input Level.................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................. 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component Signal ................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • MAX Power Per Channel [U.K., Russia, and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................... 105 W or more • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • IEC Power [U.K., Russia, and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.1% THD, 6 Ω ........................................ 90 W or more • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf) • Dynamic Power [U.S.A. and Canada models] (Impedance Selector: 8 Ω) (IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) ......................................... 110/130/160/180 W [Other models] (IHF, 6/4/2 Ω) .................................................... 105/130/150 W • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 Ω ..................................................................................... 0.41 dB • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Front ................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, 0/–3 dB V-AUX to Front .................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, 0/–3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. (2ch stereo) to Front SP OUT, [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 50 W/8 Ω ................................................... 0.06% or less [Other models] 1 kHz, 50 W/6 Ω ................................................... 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. (STEREO) Input shorted 250 mV................................................................ 100 dB or more 200 mV.................................................................. 98 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 170 µV or less • Channel Separation CD, etc. Input 5.1 kΩ shorted (1 kHz/10 kHz) ................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 200 mV, 8 Ω).................................... 0.4 V/470 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. 1 kHz, 0.5%THD (EFFECT ON) ............. 2.0 V or more • Output Level/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER OUTPUT (2ch Stereo and FRONT SP: SMALL) .................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct. 62 En • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5% AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... 240 V AC, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... 220 V AC, 60 Hz [China model] .................................................... 220 V AC, 50 Hz [U.K., Russia, and Europe models] .....................230 V AC, 50 Hz [Asia and General models] ............................................. 110-120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 240 W/320 VA [Other models] .................................................................... 240 W • Standby Power Consumption [Except Asia and General models] ...................................... 0.8 W • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] 5ch, 10%/THD ................................................................. 530 W • Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 151 x 318 mm (17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 12-1/2”) • Weight .............................................................. 8.0 kg (17 lbs 10 oz) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. INDEX Index ■ Numerics 1 SOUND MENU .......................... 43, 45 2 INPUT MENU ............................ 43, 48 2ch Stereo ............................................ 34 3 OPTION MENU ......................... 44, 50 5ch Stereo ............................................ 34 ■ A A)DISPLAY SET ................................ 50 A)INPUT ASSIGN .............................. 48 A)SPEAKER SET ............................... 45 A.DELAY ............................................ 48 Adjusting speaker levels during playback ............................... 32 Adjusting the tonal quality ................... 31 AM tuning ............................................ 37 ANTENNA terminals ............................ 9 Audio cable plugs ................................ 13 Audio delay .......................................... 48 AUDIO jacks ................................... 9, 13 Audio jacks .......................................... 13 AUDIO SELECT ................................. 31 Audio select ......................................... 50 Audio settings ...................................... 48 Automatic preset tuning ....................... 38 Automatic tuning ................................. 37 ■ B ■ C D D)CENTER GEQ .................................47 D)DECODER MODE ..........................49 D)PARAM. INI ....................................50 Decoder indicator .................................20 Decoder mode ......................................49 Decoder select mode ............................49 DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks ..............................13 DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks ...............................13 DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL assignment .....................48 DIGITAL INPUT jacks ..........................9 DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL assignment ......................48 DIMENSION .......................................35 Dimension ............................................35 DIMMER .............................................50 Dimmer ................................................50 Disc Listening ......................................26 ■ E E)BLUETOOTH ................................. 50 E)LFE LEVEL ..................................... 47 E)MULTI CH SET .............................. 49 Editing sound fields parameters .......... 35 ENHANCER indicator ........................ 20 Enjoying 2-channel sources using the standard decoders ............. 35 Exchanging preset stations .................. 39 ■ F F)D.RANGE ........................................ 47 FM tuning ............................................ 37 FRONT ................................................ 45 FRONT B ............................................ 45 FRONT B speaker setting ................... 45 Front panel display .............................. 20 Front speakers ...................................... 45 ■ G G)AUDIO SET .................................... 48 Game .................................................... 34 Game Playing ...................................... 26 ■ H Hall ...................................................... 34 HDMI .................................................. 14 HDMI jack, HDMI cable plug ............. 14 Headphone dynamic range .................. 47 Headphone LFE ................................... 47 Headphones indicator .......................... 20 HP D.R ................................................ 47 HP LFE ................................................ 47 ■ I Infrared window .................................. 21 INI.VOL. ............................................. 48 Initial volume ....................................... 48 Initializing ............................................ 54 Input assignment .................................. 48 Input channel and speaker indicators ............................ 20 Input channel indicators ...................... 20 Input menu ........................................... 43 Input rename ........................................ 49 63 En English C)AUDIO SELECT ............................. 50 C)SP DISTANCE ................................ 47 C)VOLUME TRIM ............................. 49 Canceled, Bluetooth status message ................. 58 CD Listening ........................................ 26 CD Music Listening ............................. 26 CENTER .............................................. 45 Center graphic equalizer ...................... 47 Center speaker ...................................... 45 Center width ......................................... 35 CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 20 Completed, Bluetooth status message ................. 58 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .......... 9, 13 Connect error, iPod controlling status message ....... 58 Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner .................... 15 ■ Disconnected, Bluetooth status message ................ 58 Disconnected, iPod controlling status message ...... 58 Display settings ................................... 50 DOCK indicator, Front panel display .......................... 20 DSP LEVEL ........................................ 35 DSP level ............................................. 35 DTS decoder prioritize setting ............. 49 DVD Live Viewing ............................. 26 DVD Movie Viewing .......................... 26 DVD Viewing ...................................... 26 DVR Viewing ...................................... 26 Dynamic range ..................................... 47 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION B)INPUT RENAME ............................ 49 B)MEMORY GUARD ........................ 50 B)SP LEVEL ....................................... 46 BASIC SETUP .............................. 22, 43 Basic setup ........................................... 43 BASS OUT .......................................... 46 BGV ..................................................... 49 Bluetooth setting .................................. 50 Bluetooth status message ..................... 58 BT connected, Bluetooth status message ................. 58 Connecting a CD player .......................17 Connecting a CD player and a CD recorder/MD recorder ................17 Connecting a DVD player ....................15 Connecting a DVD recorder .................15 Connecting a video monitor .................15 Connecting audio components .............17 Connecting speakers .............................11 Connecting the AM antennas ...............19 Connecting the FM antennas ................19 Connecting the power cable .................19 Connecting the Yamaha Bluetooth adapter ...............18 Connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock ...........18 Connecting to the CENTER terminals ..........................12 Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..........16 Connecting to the FRONT A terminals .........................12 Connecting to the FRONT B terminals .........................12 Connecting to the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..........16 Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks ................17 Connecting to the SURROUND terminals ....................12 Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks ..........................18 Connecting video components .............15 Controlling a TV ..................................51 Controlling other components ..............52 Creating original SCENE templates .....27 CROSSOVER ......................................46 Crossover ..............................................46 CT WIDTH ..........................................35 Index Input source indicators ......................... 20 Input source information ...................... 32 Installing batteries in the remote control .................................... 3 iPod connected, iPod controlling status message ....... 58 iPod control, Status message ............... 58 ■ J Jazz ....................................................... 34 ■ L LFE indicator ....................................... 20 LFE/Bass out ........................................ 46 Listening to unprocessed input signals ..................................... 36 Low-frequency effect level .................. 47 ■ M Manual preset tuning ........................... 38 MANUAL SETUP ............................... 43 Manual setup ........................................ 43 Manual tuning ...................................... 37 MAX VOL. .......................................... 48 Maximum volume ................................ 48 MEM.GUARD ..................................... 50 Memory guard ...................................... 50 Movie Dramatic ................................... 34 Movie Spacious .................................... 34 MULTI CH INPUT jacks ...................... 9 Multi channel input setup .................... 49 Multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones .............. 36 Multi-information display .................... 20 Music Disc Listening ........................... 26 Music Enh. 2ch .................................... 34 Music Enh. 5ch .................................... 34 MUTE indicator ................................... 20 MUTE TYP. ......................................... 48 Mute type ............................................. 48 ■ N NIGHT indicator .................................. 20 Night listening mode ............................ 31 No BT adapter, Bluetooth status message ................. 58 ■ O Option menu ........................................ 44 ■ P Pairing, Bluetooth control .................... 41 PANORAMA ....................................... 35 Panorama ............................................. 35 Parameter initialization ........................ 50 PCM indicator ...................................... 20 Placing speakers ................................... 10 Playing video sources in the background ...................................... 33 Pop/Rock .............................................. 34 PRESET ............................................... 54 Preset SCENE templates ...................... 26 ■ R Radio Listening .................................... 26 64 En Rear panel ..............................................9 Remote control codes ........................... iii Resetting the system .............................59 ■ S SCENE ...................................................7 Searching..., Bluetooth status message .................58 Selecting audio input jacks ..................31 Selecting preset stations .......................39 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component as the input source .........30 Selecting the night listening mode .......31 Selecting the SCENE templates ...........24 Set menu ...............................................43 Set this unit to the standby mode .........19 Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control .............28 Setting remote control codes ................53 Setting the speaker impedance .............12 SIGNAL INFO .....................................44 Signal information ................................44 SILENT CINEMA ...............................36 SILENT CINEMA indicator ................20 SLEEP indicator ...................................20 Sleep timer ...........................................33 Sound field programs ...........................34 Sound menu ..........................................43 SP A B indicators .................................20 SP D.R ..................................................47 SP IMP. ................................................54 SP LFE .................................................47 Speaker distance ...................................47 Speaker distances .................................47 Speaker dynamic range ........................47 Speaker impedance ..............................54 Speaker level ........................................46 Speaker LFE .........................................47 Speaker settings ....................................45 SPEAKERS terminals ............................9 Specifications .......................................62 START PAIRING ................................50 Start pairing, .........................................50 Straight mode .......................................36 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack ...............9 Subwoofer phase ..................................46 Supplied accessories ..............................3 SUR. LR ...............................................45 Surround left/right speakers .................45 SWFR PHASE .....................................46 ■ ■ U UNIT ................................................... 47 Unit ...................................................... 47 Unknown iPod, iPod controlling status message ...... 58 Using the remote control ..................... 21 Using your headphones ....................... 30 ■ V Video cable plugs ................................ 13 VIDEO jacks ................................... 9, 13 Video jacks .......................................... 13 Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................... 36 VIRTUAL indicator ............................ 20 VOLTAGE SELECTOR ....................... 3 VOLUME level indicator .................... 20 Volume Trim ....................................... 49 ■ Z Zone B ................................................. 30 T TEST ....................................................47 Test tone ...............................................47 Troubleshooting ...................................55 TU ........................................................54 Tuner frequency step ............................54 Tuner indicators ...................................20 Turning off the power ..........................19 Turning on the power ...........................19 TV Sports .............................................34 TV Sports Viewing ..............................26 TV Viewing ..........................................26 “ASTANDBY/ON” or “3DVD” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. ■ Front panel A B C D E F G H VOLUME STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING BAND A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT PROGRAM PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL VIDEO AUX INPUT VIDEO AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA I i 4 J K L M N O P L AUDIO R PORTABLE ■ Remote control 1 2 3 POWER POWER TV AV A STANDBY POWER B C MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 D E F TV CH G TV VOL 4 SCENE 5 6 BAND LEVEL TITLE 7 3 MENU 4 VOLUME I ENTER 8 DISPLAY RETURN H J REC 9 0 l PROG h 1 2 A STRAIGHT B MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 5 9 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 4 NIGHT 6 0 7 8 SLEEP 10 ENT K L M N O APPENDIX C ii List of remote control codes Blu-ray player Samsung 2137 CD player Yamaha 5000, 5013 CD Recorder Yamaha 5001 DVD Acoustic Solutions 2078 Aiwa 2055, 2100 Akai 2096 Akura 2076 Alba 2078, 2086 Apex 2027, 2049 Awa 2078 Axion 2078 Brainwave 2096 Brandt 2073, 2085 Broksonic 2060 Bush 2075, 2078, 2112 Centrex 2077 Classic 2078 Clatronic 2075 Coby 2078 C-Tech 2074 CyberHome 2025, 2079, 2091 Daewoo 2092, 2098 Dansai 2096 Daytek 2080, 2089 DEC 2075 Denon 2030, 2102, 2103 Denver 2075, 2076 Diamond 2074 DK Digital 2094 Dual 2078 D-Vision 2096 DVX 2074 Elta 2096 Euroline 2096 Funai 2052, 2058 Global Solutions2074 Global Sphere 2074 Goodmans 2075, 2077, 2078 Grundig 2077, 2098 H&B 2075 Haaz 2074 HE 2078 Hitachi 2032, 2072 Home Electronics 2078 Innovation 2072 Irradio 2134 JDB 2078 JVC 2033, 2045, 2053, 2073, 2099 Kenwood 2030, 2097 Kingavon 2075 Koda 2075 Lawson 2074 Lenco 2075 LG 2084, 2087 Lifetec 2072 Limit 2074 LogicLab 2074 Luxor 2077 Magnavox 2037, 2073, 2075 Magnum 2072 iii MBO Medion Micromaxx Micromedia Microstar Mitsubishi Mizuda Mustek Naiko Onkyo Orava P&B Pacific Panasonic 2078 2072 2072 2073 2072 2035 2075 2078 2077 2073, 2135 2075 2075 2074 2030, 2040, 2054, 2057, 2105, 2110 Philips 2019, 2026, 2046, 2073, 2081, 2090 Pioneer 2036, 2082 Proline 2077 Provision 2075 RCA 2031, 2042, 2050, 2051 Red Star 2076 Reoc 2074 Roadstar 2075, 2078, 2086 Rowa 2077 Saba 2085 Sabaki 2074 Samsung 2032, 2041, 2104, 2113 Sansui 2074 Sanyo 2095 ScanMagic 2078 Scientific Labs 2074 Scott 2088 SEG 2074, 2086 Sharp 2034, 2043, 2059, 2093, 2106 Silva 2076 Singer 2074 Skymaster 2074, 2078 Skyworth 2076 SM Electronic 2074, 2078 Sony 2028, 2029, 2039, 2083, 2107 Soundmaster 2074 Soundmax 2074 Standard 2074 Star Cluster 2074 Starmedia 2075 Supervision 2074, 2078 Sylvania 2052, 2058 Synn 2074 TCM 2072 Teac 2074 Tec 2076 Technics 2030 Technika 2096 Technosonic 2096 Tevion 2072, 2074 Thomson 2085, 2109 Tokai 2076 Toshiba 2026, 2044, 2048, 2056, 2073, 2108, 2111 United 2078 Voxson 2078 Wharfedale 2074 Xlogic 2074 Yakumo 2077 Yamada 2077 Yamaha Yukai Zenith 2000, 2001, 2003, 2030, 2101 2078 2038, 2047, 2073 DVD Recorder Apex JVC LG Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Sony Toshiba Yamaha Yukai 2024 2070 2071 2020, 2065, 2066, 2067 2019, 2061, 2062, 2063 2021 2018 2022, 2064 2068 2023 2069 DVD/LD Pioneer 2036 DVD/VCR JVC LG Panasonic Philips RCA Samsung Sharp Sony Toshiba Zenith 1017, 2045 1071, 2087 1020, 1072, 2040, 2105 1025 1022, 2042 1021, 2041, 2104 1023, 1073, 2043, 2106 1019, 1074, 2039, 2107 1024, 1075, 2044, 2108 1026, 2047 DVD-DVR Panasonic Pioneer Samsung Toshiba 2132 2132 2132 2132 2015, 2016, 2017, 2120 Philips 2117, 2121, 2123, 2128 Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014 Proscan 2129 RCA 2116, 2124, 2129, 2133 ReplayTV 2118, 2119, 2120 Sharp 2009, 2010 Sonic Blue 2119, 2120 Sony 2005, 2006, 2007, 2122, 2130, 2131, 2132 Stack 10 2132 Stack 9 2132 Systemax 2132 Tagar Systems 2132 Tivo 2116, 2121, 2122, 2123, 2130, 2131 Toshiba 2004, 2125, 2132 Touch 2132 UltimateTV 2133 Viewsonic 2132 Voodoo 2132 Yamaha 2011 ZT Group 2132 HD DVD Toshiba 2132 2132 2132 2132 2123, 2128, 2129, 2133 DISH Network 2126, 2127 Dishpro 2126 Echostar 2126, 2127 Expressvu 2126 Gateway 2132 GOI 2126 Hewlett Packard 2132 Hitachi 2008 Howard Computers 2132 HTS 2126 Hughes 2123, 2128 Humax 2123 Hush 2132 iBUYPOWER 2132 JVC 2126, 2127 Linksys 2132 Media Center PC 2132 2136 iPod Yamaha 5011 LD player Yamaha 2067 2114 2115 2068 DVR ABS Alienware CyberPower Dell DIRECTV Microsoft Mind Niveus Media Northgate Panasonic 2002 MD Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004 TAPE DECK Yamaha 5005, 5006 TUNER Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5012, 5014, 5015, 5016, 5017, 5018 TV Acer Acme Acura ADA ADC Admiral Adyson Agashi Agazi AGB Aiko Aiwa 0093 0207 0208 0255 0206 0058, 0205, 0206, 0210, 0211 0200, 0207 0200 0206 0204 0127, 0200, 0207, 0208 0028, 0139, 0229, 0237 Akai Cascade Cathay CCE Celebrity Centurion Century CGE Cimline Citizen 0208 0213, 0217 0127 0059 0213, 0217 0205 0214, 0215 0208, 0218 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 City 0208 Clarivox 0212, 0217 Clatronic 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0214, 0218 CMS 0200 Colortyme 0060, 0061 Concerto 0060, 0061 Concorde 0208 Condor 0200, 0207, 0213 Contec 0200, 0207, 0208 Contec/Cony 0062 Continental Edison 0216 Cosmel 0208 Craig 0062 Crosley 0205, 0214, 0215 Crown 0062, 0063, 0128, 0208, 0213, 0217 CS Electronics 0200, 0207, 0209, 0214, 0218 CTC 0214 Curtis Mathes 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064, 0065 CXC 0062 Cybertron 0209, 0218 Daewoo 0060, 0061, 0120, 0127, 0155, 0193, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0218, 0238 Dainichi 0200, 0209, 0218 Dansai 0200, 0206, 0213, 0217 Dantax 0217 Daytron 0060, 0061, 0208 De Graaf 0210 Decca 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217 Desmet 0213, 0217 Diamond 0200 Dimensia 0057 Dixi 0208, 0213, 0217 DTS 0208 Dual 0207, 0215, 0216 Dual-Tec 0207, 0208, 0215 Dumont 0060, 0127, 0205, 0207 Durabrand 0126 Dux 0217 Dynatron 0213, 0217 Elbe 0203, 0204, 0212, 0218 Elbe-Sharp 0204 Elcit 0204, 0205 ELECTRO TECH 0208 Electroband 0059 Electrohome 0059, 0060, 0061 Elin 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 Elite 0209, 0213, 0218 Elman 0215 Elta 0200, 0208 Emerson 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064, 0128, 0205 Envision Erres ESA Etron Euro-Feel Euroline Euroman Euromann Europhon 0060, 0061 0213, 0217 0080 0208 0206 0217 0200 0206, 0207, 0213 0200, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215 Fenner 0208 Ferguson 0212, 0217, 0226 Fidelity 0200, 0207, 0210 Finlandia 0210 Finlux 0204, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217 Firstline 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214 Fisher 0064, 0127, 0128, 0205, 0207, 0215 Flint 0213, 0218 Formenti 0200, 0205, 0207, 0215, 0217 Formenti-Phoenix 0200 Fortress 0205 Frontech 0206, 0208, 0210, 0211, 0214 Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025, 0088, 0127 Funai 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0062, 0206 Futuretech 0062 Gateway 0094 GBC 0208, 0215, 0218 GE 0057, 0060, 0061, 0122, 0147 GEC 0204, 0207, 0211, 0213, 0217 Geloso 0208, 0210, 0215 General Technic 0208 Genexxa 0209, 0211, 0213, 0218 Gibralter 0060 GoldHand 0200 GoldStar 0060, 0061, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Goodmans 0171, 0201, 0204, 0206, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0240 GPM 0209, 0218 Graetz 0211 Granada 0204, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217 Grandin 0208, 0209, 0217 Grundig 0128, 0130, 0222, 0236, 0255 Grunpy 0062 Halifax 0200, 0206, 0207 Hallmark 0060, 0061 Hampton 0200, 0207 Hanseatic 0203, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0215, 0217 Hantarex 0204, 0208 Harvard 0062 HCM 0206, 0207, 0208, 0218 Hifivox 0216 Higashi 0200 Hinari 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Hisawa Hitachi 0209, 0218 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0060, 0061, 0095, 0105, 0127, 0156, 0179, 0180, 0204, 0207, 0210, 0211, 0215, 0216, 0251 Hornyphon 0213 Hoshai 0209, 0218 Huanyu 0200, 0207 Hygashi 0200, 0207 Hyper 0200, 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 Hypson 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 ICE 0127, 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 ICeS 0200, 0218 IMA 0062 Imperial 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215 Indiana 0213, 0217 Infinity 0063 Ingelen 0211 Ingersol 0208 Inno Hit 0201, 0204, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Innovation 0206, 0208 Interbuy 0208, 0214 Interfunk 0205, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0216, 0217 International 0200 Intervision 0206, 0207, 0218 Irradio 0201, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Isukai 0209, 0218 ITC 0207, 0215 ITS 0200, 0209, 0213, 0218 ITT 0129, 0208, 0211 ITV 0208, 0217 JBL 0063 JC Penney 0057, 0060, 0061 JCB 0059 Jensen 0060, 0061 JVC 0017, 0018, 0019, 0108, 0136, 0153, 0178, 0190, 0213, 0218 Kaisui 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0218 Kamosonic 0207 Kamp 0200, 0207 Kapsch 0211 Karcher 0207, 0208, 0212, 0217 Kawasho 0059, 0060, 0061, 0200 Kendo 0128, 0210 Kennedy 0215 Kenwood 0060, 0061 Kingsley 0200, 0207 Kloss Novabeam 0062 Kneissel 0203 Kolster 0213 Konka 0209, 0218 Korpel 0213, 0217 Korting 0205 Koyoda 0208 KTV 0062, 0127, 0207 Kyoto 0200, 0212 iv APPENDIX 0059, 0065, 0127, 0129, 0130, 0200, 0204, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218, 0255 Akiba 0209, 0218 Akura 0206, 0209, 0218 Alaron 0200 Alba 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0217, 0218 ALBIRAL 0212 Allstar 0213 Amplivision 0207 Amstrad 0204, 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218 Amtron 0062 Anam 0208 Anam National 0062 Anglo 0208 Anitech 0206, 0208 Ansonic 0203, 0208 AOC 0060, 0061 Apex 0118, 0122, 0132 Arc en Ciel 0216 Arcam 0200 Arcam Delta 0207 Aristona 0213, 0217 ASA 0205, 0211 Asberg 0213 Astra 0208 Asuka 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 Atlantic 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 Atori 0208 Audiosonic 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0218 AudioTon 0207 Audiovox 0062 Autovox 0205, 0206, 0207 Awa 0200 Baird 0216 Bang & Olufsen 0205 Basic Line 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Bastide 0207 Baur 0217 Beko 0228 Belcor 0060 Bell & Howell 0058, 0064 Benq 0081 Beon 0213, 0217 Bestar 0213 Binatone 0207 Black Star 0214 Blaupunkt 0255 Blue Sky 0209, 0218 Bondstec 0214 Boots 0207 Bradford 0062 Brandt 0216, 0226 Brionvega 0205, 0213, 0217 Britannia 0200, 0207 Brockwood 0060 Broksonic 0138 Bruns 0205 BSR 0215 BTC 0209, 0218 Bush 0177, 0208, 0209, 0210, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218, 0230, 0237 Candle 0060, 0061 Capsonic 0206 Lenco Lenoir Lesa Leyco LG 0208 0207, 0208 0214 0206, 0213, 0217 0016, 0038, 0039, 0127, 0128, 0157, 0158, 0163, 0164, 0166, 0188, 0189, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Liesenk 0217 Life 0206, 0208 Lifetec 0206, 0208, 0218 Loewe 0063, 0128, 0203, 0204, 0223, 0227 Loewe Opta 0205, 0213, 0217 Logik 0058 Luma 0210, 0217 Lumatron 0210, 0213, 0217 Lux May 0213 Luxman 0060, 0061 Luxor 0201, 0207, 0210 LXI 0057, 0061, 0063, 0064 Magnadyne 0204, 0205, 0214, 0215, 0217 Magnafon 0200, 0204, 0207 Magnavox 0060, 0061, 0063, 0102, 0103, 0150 Magnum 0206, 0208 Majestic 0058 Mandor 0206 Manesth 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 Marantz 0060, 0061, 0063, 0090, 0213, 0217 Marelli 0205 Mark 0200, 0213, 0217 Matsui 0204, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0217 Mediator 0213, 0217 Medion 0206, 0208 Megatron 0061 Melectronic 0200, 0207, 0208, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217 Memorex 0058, 0061, 0064, 0208 Memphis 0208 Metz 0205 MGA 0060, 0061 Micromaxx 0206, 0208 Microstar 0206, 0208 Minerva 0204 Minoka 0213 Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0060, 0061, 0104, 0112, 0113, 0125, 0205, 0213 Mivar 0200, 0201, 0202, 0203, 0204, 0207 Montgomery Ward 0058 MTC 0060, 0061, 0128, 0200 Multi System 0217 Multitech 0062, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0214, 0215, 0217 Murphy 0200, 0207 NAD 0061 Naonis 0210 v NEC 0026, 0053, 0060, 0061, 0096, 0127 Neckermann 0205, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217, 0255 NEI 0213, 0217 Nesco 0214 NET-TV 0082, 0101 New Tech 0208, 0213 New World 0209, 0218 Nicamagic 0200, 0207 Nikkai 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Nikko 0061 Nobliko 0200, 0207 Nogamatic 0216 Nokia 0129, 0211 Nordmende 0205, 0211, 0213, 0216 Nordvision 0217 Oceanic 0211 Olevia 0084 ONCEAS 0207 Onwa 0062, 0218 Orbit 0213 Orion 0126, 0204, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0235 Orline 0218 Orsowe 0204 Osaki 0127, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 Osio 0201 Oso 0209, 0218 Osume 0218 Otto Versand 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0255 Pael 0200, 0207 Palladium 0207 Panama 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208 Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0063, 0073, 0074, 0097, 0110, 0114, 0137, 0141, 0151, 0162, 0165, 0186, 0204, 0211, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254 Pathe Cinema 0200, 0203, 0207, 0212, 0215 Pathe Marconi 0212, 0216 Pausa 0208 Perdio 0200 Philco 0060, 0061, 0063, 0128, 0205, 0214, 0215 Philharmonic 0207 Philips 0040, 0060, 0063, 0072, 0115, 0116, 0124, 0130, 0150, 0175, 0184, 0187, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217, 0220, 0221, 0232, 0233, 0252, 0253 Philips Magnavox 0124 Phoenix 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 Phonola 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 Pilot 0060 Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0060, 0061, 0098, 0109, 0117, 0128, 0181, 0182, 0194, 0195, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0250 Plantron 0206, 0213 Polaroid 0075 Poppy 0208 Portland 0060, 0061 Prandoni-Prince 0204, 0210 Precision 0207 Prima 0208, 0211 Profex 0208 Profi-Tronic 0213 Proline 0213 Proscan 0057 Prosonic 0200, 0207, 0217 Protech 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Proton 0060, 0061 Provision 0217 Pulsar 0060 Pye 0213, 0217 Pymi 0208 Quasar 0152, 0214 Quelle 0201, 0206, 0207, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Radialva 0218 Radio Shack 0064 Radio Shack/Realistic 0057, 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 Radiola 0213, 0217 Radiomarelli 0204, 0205, 0214 Radiotone 0213 RCA 0057, 0060, 0061, 0091, 0133, 0135, 0147, 0149 Realistic 0064 Revox 0213, 0217 Rex 0206, 0210, 0211 RFT 0203, 0205 Rhapsody 0200 R-Line 0213, 0217 Roadstar 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218, 0237 Robotron 0205 Rowa 0200 RTF 0205 Saba 0204, 0205, 0211, 0216 saccs 0212 Saisho 0204, 0206, 0207, 0208 Salora 0201, 0204, 0210, 0211, 0215 Sambers 0204 Sampo 0060, 0061, 0083, 0101 Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0060, 0061, 0065, 0068, 0069, 0071, 0079, 0087, 0127, 0128, 0130, 0144, 0160, 0161, 0170, 0176, 0183, 0185, 0200, 0201, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0239, 0241, 0242, 0243 Sandra 0200, 0207 Sansui 0123, 0126, 0213 Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0060, 0064, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0203, 0207, 0215 SBR 0217 SCHAUB LORENTZ 0211 Schneider 0207, 0209, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218 Scotch 0061 Scott 0060, 0061, 0062 Sears 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064 SEG 0200, 0206, 0207, 0214, 0215, 0217 SEI 0204 SEI-Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0211 Seleco 0210, 0211, 0215 Sencora 0208 Sentra 0218 Serino 0200 Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011, 0060, 0061, 0066, 0070, 0087, 0111, 0143, 0145, 0167, 0168, 0169, 0198, 0204, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0249 Shogun 0060 Siarem 0204, 0205, 0215 Sicatel 0212 Siemens 0255 Sierra 0213 Signature 0058 Silva 0200 Singer 0205, 0214, 0215 Sinudyne 0204, 0205, 0215, 0217 Skantic 0211 Solavox 0211 Sonoko 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217 Sonolor 0211 Sontec 0213, 0217 Sony 0041, 0059, 0067, 0085, 0086, 0174, 0196, 0199, 0208, 0219, 0234 Sound & Vision 0209, 0218 Soundesign 0060, 0061, 0062 Soundwave 0213, 0217 SSS 0060, 0062 Standard 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Starlight 0217 Starlite 0062 Stenway 0218 Stern 0210, 0211 Sunkai 0208, 0218 Sunwood 0208, 0213 Superla 0200, 0204, 0207 SuperTech 0200 Supra 0208 Supreme 0059 Susumu 0209 Sutron 0208 Sydney 0200, 0207 Sylvania 0060, 0061, 0063, 0080, 0134, 0142, 0148 Symphonic 0062, 0080 Sysline 0217 Sytong 0200 Tandy Weltblick 0213, 0217 Weston 0215 White Westinghouse 0200, 0207, 0217 Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0060, 0061 Yamishi 0218 Yoko 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 Yorx 0209, 0218 Zanussi 0210 Zenith 0058, 0060, 0100, 0105, 0119, 0121, 0154 TV/DVD Aiwa Apex Broksonic Bush JVC Panasonic RCA Sylvania Thomson Toshiba 0139, 2055 0132, 2049 0138, 2060 0230, 2112 0136, 2053 0137, 0254, 2054, 2110 0133, 0135, 2050, 2051 0134, 2052 0226, 2109 0131, 0231, 2048, 2111 TV/DVD/VCR Panasonic Samsung Sharp Sylvania Toshiba 0141, 1040, 2057 0241, 1070, 2113 0143, 1028, 2059 0142, 1041, 2058 0140, 1029, 2056 TV/VCR Aiwa Bush Daewoo GE Goodmans Grundig Hitachi JVC Magnavox Orion Panasonic Philips Quasar RCA Roadstar Samsung Sharp Sony Sylvania Tatung Toshiba Zenith 0237, 1066 0237, 1066 0155, 0238, 1038, 1067 0147, 1030 0240, 1069 0236, 1062 0156, 1039 0153, 1036 0150, 1033 0235, 1065 0151, 1034 0150, 0232, 0233, 1033, 1062, 1063 0152, 1035 0149, 1032 0237, 1066 0144, 0239, 1027, 1068 0145, 1028 0234, 1064 0148, 1031 0237, 1066 0146, 0237, 1029, 1066 0154, 1037 VCR Admiral Adventura Aiwa Akai Akiba Akura 1008, 1013 1005 1005, 1042, 1043, 1044, 1066 1007, 1043 1050 1043, 1050 Alba American High Amstrad Anitech ASA Asha Asuka 1044, 1050 1004 1042 1050 1045, 1046 1002, 1014 1042, 1045, 1046, 1050 Audio Dynamics1000 Audiovox 1003 Baird 1042, 1043, 1047 Basic Line 1044, 1050 Baur 1046 Beaumark 1002, 1014 Bell & Howell 1001 Blaupunkt 1046, 1048 Broksonic 1012, 1013 Bush 1044, 1050, 1066 Calix 1003 Candle 1002, 1003 Canon 1004 CCE 1006 CGE 1042, 1043 Cimline 1044, 1050 Citizen 1002, 1003 Colortyme 1000 Colt 1006 Craig 1002, 1003, 1006, 1014 Crown 1050 Curtis Mathes 1000, 1002, 1004, 1009 Cybernex 1002, 1014 Daewoo 1005, 1038, 1061, 1067 Dansai 1050 Dantax 1044 DBX 1000 De Graaf 1046, 1049 Decca 1042, 1043, 1046 Denon 1010 Dimensia 1009 Dual 1043, 1046 Dumont 1042, 1046, 1047, 1049 Dynatech 1005 Electrohome 1003 Electrophonic 1003 Elta 1050 Emerson 1003, 1004, 1005, 1012, 1013 Etzuko 1050 Ferguson 1043 Fidelity 1042 Finlandia 1046, 1047, 1049 Finlux 1042, 1043, 1046, 1047, 1049 FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049, 1050 Fisher 1001, 1047 Flint 1044 Formenti/Phoenix 1046 Fuji 1004 Fujitsu 1042 Funai 1005, 1042 Galaxy 1042 Garrard 1005 GBC 1050 GE 1002, 1004, 1009, 1014, 1030 GEC 1046 Geloso 1050 General Technic 1044, 1048 Go Video 1014 GoldHand Goldstar 1050 1000, 1003, 1042, 1045 Goodmans 1042, 1045, 1050, 1069 Gradiente 1005 Graetz 1043, 1047 Granada 1046, 1047, 1049 Grandin 1042, 1045, 1050 Grundig 1046, 1050, 1062 Hanseatic 1045, 1046 Harley Davidson1005 Harman/Kardon 1000 Harwood 1006 HCM 1050 Headquarter 1001 Hinari 1044, 1050 Hisawa 1044 Hitachi 1007, 1010, 1039, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1049 Hughes Network Systems 1010 Hypson 1044, 1050 Imperial 1042 Inno Hit 1046, 1050 Innovation 1044, 1048 Instant Replay 1004 Interbuy 1045 Interfunk 1046, 1047 Intervision 1042 Irradio 1045, 1050 ITT 1043, 1047 ITV 1045 JC Penney 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1006 JCL 1004 Jensen 1007 JVC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1017, 1036, 1043 Kaisui 1050 Karcher 1046 Kendo 1044 Kenwood 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043 KLH 1006 Kodak 1003, 1004 Korpel 1050 Leyco 1050 LG 1003, 1042, 1045, 1071 Lifetec 1044, 1048 Lloyd's 1005 Loewe 1048 Loewe Opta 1045, 1046 Logik 1006, 1050 Luxor 1047 LXI 1003 M Electronic 1042 Magnasonic 1047 Magnavox 1004, 1018, 1033 Magnin 1003, 1014 Manesth 1050 Marantz 1000, 1001, 1004, 1046, 1051 Marta 1003 Matsui 1044, 1045 Matsushita 1004 Mediator 1046 Medion 1044, 1048 MEI 1004 vi APPENDIX 0127, 0207, 0209, 0211, 0218 Tashiko 0200, 0207, 0210 Tatung 0127, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217, 0237 TCM 0206, 0208 Teac 0127 Tec 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 Techwood 0060, 0061 Teknika 0058, 0060, 0061, 0062 Teleavia 0216 Telecor 0218 Telefunken 0065, 0213, 0216 Telegazi 0218 Teletech 0208, 0214, 0217 Teleton 0207 Televideon 0200 Tensai 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 Tesmet 0213 Tevion 0206, 0208 Texet 0200, 0207 Thomson 0191, 0192, 0207, 0213, 0216, 0226 Thorn 0212, 0217 TMK 0060, 0061 Tokai 0213 Tokyo 0200, 0207 Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0064, 0078, 0089, 0090, 0106, 0107, 0127, 0131, 0140, 0146, 0159, 0197, 0225, 0231, 0237 Towada 0211, 0215 Transtec 0200 Trident 0204 Tristar 0218 Triumph 0204 Uher 0211, 0213 Ultravox 0200, 0205, 0207, 0214, 0215 United 0217 Universum 0127, 0128, 0129, 0201, 0206, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Univox 0212 Vestel 0210, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 Vexa 0208, 0217 Victor 0213 VIDEOLOGIC 0200 Videologique 0200, 0207, 0209, 0218 Videosat 0214 VideoSystem 0213 Videotechnic 0200 Vidtech 0060, 0061 Viewsonic 0076, 0077, 0092, 0099, 0172, 0173 Visiola 0200, 0207 Vision 0213 Vortec 0213, 0217 Voxson 0205, 0210, 0211, 0213 Waltham 0207, 0212 Wards 0057, 0058, 0060, 0061, 0063 Watson 0213, 0217, 0218 Watt Radio 0200, 0207, 0212, 0215 Wega 0205 01EN_RX-V363_U_cv-4.fm Page vii Wednesday, April 16, 2008 3:56 PM Memorex 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008, 1013, 1014, 1042, 1045, 1047 Memphis 1050 Metz 1048 MGA 1014 MGN Technology 1002, 1014 Micromaxx 1044, 1048 Microstar 1044, 1048 Migros 1042 Minolta 1010 Mitsubishi 1011, 1042, 1046 Montgomery Ward 1008 Motorola 1004, 1008 MTC 1002, 1014 Multitech 1002, 1005, 1006, 1042, 1046, 1050 Murphy 1042 National 1048 NEC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043, 1051 Neckermann 1043, 1046 NEI 1046 Nesco 1050 Nikko 1003 Noblex 1002, 1014 Nokia 1043, 1047 Nordmende 1043 Oceanic 1042, 1043 Okano 1044 Olympus 1004 Optimus 1003, 1008 Orion 1012, 1013, 1044, 1065 Orson 1042 Osaki 1042, 1045, 1050 Otto Versand 1046 Palladium 1043, 1045, 1050 Panasonic 1004, 1020, 1034, 1040, 1048, 1054, 1072 Pathe Marconi Penney Pentax Perdio Philco Philips 1043 1010, 1014 1010, 1049 1042 1004, 1051 1004, 1025, 1033, 1046, 1056, 1057, 1059, 1062, 1063 Philips Magnavox 1018 Phonola 1046 Pilot 1003 Pioneer 1011, 1046 Prinz 1042 Profex 1050 Profitronic 1014 Proline 1042 Proscan 1009 Prosonic 1044 Protec 1006 Pye 1046, 1056 Quarter 1001 Quartz 1001, 1047 Quasar 1004, 1035 Quelle 1042, 1046, 1047 Radio Shack 1003 Radio Shack/Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 Radiola 1046 Radix 1003 Randex 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1009, 1010, 1014, 1015, 1022, 1032 Realistic 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 Rex 1043 RFT 1046 Roadstar 1045, 1050, 1066 Saba 1043 Saisho 1044, 1050 Salora 1047 Samsung 1002, 1014, 1021, 1027, 1052, 1068, 1070 Sanky 1008 Sansui 1007, 1011, 1013, 1043 Sanyo 1001, 1002, 1014, 1047 SBR 1046 Schaub Lorenz 1042, 1043, 1047 Schneider 1042, 1044, 1045, 1046, 1050 Scott 1012 Sears 1001, 1003, 1004, 1010 SEG 1050 SEI-Sinudyne 1046 Seleco 1043 Sentron 1050 Sharp 1008, 1023, 1028, 1053, 1073 Shintom 1006, 1047, 1050 Shivaki 1045 Shogun 1002, 1014 Siemens 1045, 1047 Signature 2000 1008 Silva 1045 Singer 1004, 1006 Sinudyne 1046 Sontec 1045 Sony 1016, 1019, 1055, 1060, 1064, 1074 STS 1004, 1010 Sunkai 1044 Sunstar 1042 Suntronic 1042 Sunwood 1050 Sylvania 1004, 1005, 1031, 1041 Symphonic 1005 Taisho 1044 Tandy 1001 Tashiko 1003, 1042 © 2008 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Tatung 1007, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1066 TCM 1044, 1048 Teac 1005, 1007 Technics 1004, 1048 Teknika 1003, 1004, 1005 Teleavia 1043 Telefunken 1043 Tenosal 1050 Tensai 1042, 1045, 1050 Tevion 1044, 1048 Thomson 1043, 1058 Thorn 1043, 1047 TMK 1002, 1014 Tokai 1045, 1050 Tonsai 1050 Toshiba 1013, 1024, 1029, 1043, 1046, 1066, 1075 Totevision 1002, 1003, 1014 Towada 1050 Towika 1050 Uher 1045 Unitech 1002, 1014 Universum 1042, 1045, 1046 Vector Research 1000 Video Concepts 1000 Videon 1044, 1048 Videosonic 1002, 1014 Wards 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1014 Weltblick 1045 White Westinghouse 1013 XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006 Yamaha 1000, 1001, 1007 Yamishi 1050 Yokan 1050 Yoko 1045, 1050 Zenith 1013, 1026, 1037 All rights reserved. Printed in China WQ16440 00_Sheet_RX-V363_U.book Page 1 Sunday, December 2, 2007 8:51 PM UC RX-V363 The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual. Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi. ■ Front panel/Face avant A B C D E F G H VOLUME STANDBY /ON EDIT PRESET/TUNING BAND A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT PROGRAM PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL VIDEO AUX INPUT VIDEO AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA I Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI 4 J K L M N O P L AUDIO R PORTABLE 00_Sheet_RX-V363_U.book Page i Sunday, December 2, 2007 8:51 PM ■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande 1 2 3 POWER POWER TV AV A STANDBY POWER B C MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX/DOCK D E AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE 1 2 D E F TV CH G TV VOL 4 SCENE 5 6 BAND LEVEL TITLE 7 8 3 MENU 4 VOLUME I ENTER RETURN H DISPLAY J REC 9 0 l PROG h 1 2 A STRAIGHT B MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL 5 9 ENHANCER SUR. DECODE 3 4 NIGHT 6 0 7 10 8 SLEEP ENT K L M N O C Printed in China Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI WN26250-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptores AV
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
- Este manual también es adecuado para
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Le manuel du propriétaire
- italiano: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Manuale del proprietario
- English: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Owner's manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Bedienungsanleitung
- русский: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Инструкция по применению
- Nederlands: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver de handleiding
- português: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Brugervejledning
- polski: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Návod k obsluze
- Türkçe: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver El kitabı
- suomi: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Omistajan opas
- română: Yamaha RXV363-B - Home Theater Receiver Manualul proprietarului
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha HTR-6130BL - 500 Watt Home Theater Receiver El manual del propietario
-
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-V863 El manual del propietario
-
-
-
-
-